]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texi
Bump to autoconf 2.69 and automake 1.15.1
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
219d1afa 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 27@set M68K
833794fc 28@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 29@set MMIX
2469cfa2 30@set MSP430
35c08157 31@set NDS32
78058a5e 32@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 35@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 36@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
219d1afa 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
219d1afa 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 136@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
137@ifset ARM
138* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
139@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
140@ifset M68HC11
141* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
142@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
143@ifset HPPA
144* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
146@ifset M68K
147* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
148@end ifset
833794fc
MR
149@ifset MIPS
150* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
151@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
152@ifset POWERPC
153* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
154@end ifset
155@ifset POWERPC64
156* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
158@ifset S/390
159* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifclear SingleFormat
381@cindex binary input format
382@kindex -b @var{format}
383@kindex --format=@var{format}
384@cindex input format
385@cindex input format
386@item -b @var{input-format}
387@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
388@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
389file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 390@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 391that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 392configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 393to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
394default input format the most usual format on each machine.
395@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
396supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
397formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
398@xref{BFD}.
399
400You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
401binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
402linking object files of different formats), by including
403@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 404particular format.
252b5132
RH
405
406The default format is taken from the environment variable
407@code{GNUTARGET}.
408@ifset UsesEnvVars
409@xref{Environment}.
410@end ifset
411You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
412@code{TARGET};
413@ifclear man
414see @ref{Format Commands}.
415@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
416@end ifclear
417
418@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
419@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@cindex compatibility, MRI
421@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
422@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 423For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 424files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
425@ifclear man
426@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
427@end ifclear
428@ifset man
429the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
430@end ifset
431Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 432the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
433scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
434If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
435specified by any @samp{-L} options.
436
437@cindex common allocation
438@kindex -d
439@kindex -dc
440@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 441@item -d
252b5132
RH
442@itemx -dc
443@itemx -dp
444These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
445compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
446even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
447script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
448@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
449
7ee314fa
AM
450@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
451@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
452@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
453@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
454Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
455@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
456specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
457will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
458option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 459The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 460
252b5132
RH
461@cindex entry point, from command line
462@kindex -e @var{entry}
463@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 464@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
465@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
466Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
467program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
468named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
469and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
470base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
471@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
472and other ways of specifying the entry point.
473
b58f81ae
DJ
474@kindex --exclude-libs
475@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
476Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 477exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
478@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
479automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
480port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
481explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
482option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
483be treated as hidden.
484
e1c37eb5
DK
485@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
486@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
487Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
488should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
489into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
490may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
491used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
492the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
493match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
494command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
495of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
496regardless of this option.
497
252b5132
RH
498@cindex dynamic symbol table
499@kindex -E
500@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 501@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
502@item -E
503@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
504@itemx --no-export-dynamic
505When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
506option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
507all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
508set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
509
510If you do not use either of these options (or use the
511@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
512dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
513referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
514
515If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
516back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
517dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
518linking the program itself.
519
55255dae 520You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 521be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 522See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 523
8b747e1a
DK
524Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
525support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
526the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
527
36f63dca 528@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
529@cindex big-endian objects
530@cindex endianness
531@kindex -EB
532@item -EB
533Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
534
535@cindex little-endian objects
536@kindex -EL
537@item -EL
538Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 539@end ifclear
252b5132 540
2509a395
SL
541@kindex -f @var{name}
542@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
543@item -f @var{name}
544@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
545When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
546to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
547table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
548symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
549
550If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
551run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
552the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
553first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
554@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
555in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
556Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
557implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
558machine specific performance.
559
560This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
561will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
562
2509a395
SL
563@kindex -F @var{name}
564@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 565@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 566@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
567When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
568the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
569of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
570on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
571
572If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
573run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
574dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
575filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
576found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
577used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
578@var{name}.
579
ff5dcc92 580Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 581toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
582object files.
583@ifclear SingleFormat
584The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 585@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 586@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
587environment variable.
588@end ifclear
589The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
590creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 591
3dbf70a2 592@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
593@kindex -fini=@var{name}
594@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
595When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
596executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
597address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
598the function to call.
599
252b5132
RH
600@kindex -g
601@item -g
602Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
603
2509a395
SL
604@kindex -G @var{value}
605@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 606@cindex object size
2509a395 607@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
608@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
609Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
610@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 611MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
612sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
613
614@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 615@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 616@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 617@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
618@itemx -soname=@var{name}
619When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
620the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
621which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
622linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
623field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
624
625@kindex -i
626@cindex incremental link
627@item -i
628Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
629
3dbf70a2 630@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
631@kindex -init=@var{name}
632@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
633When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
634executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
635of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
636function to call.
637
252b5132 638@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 639@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 640@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 641@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
642@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
643Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
644list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
645If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 646will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 647will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 648
ff5dcc92 649On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
650files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
651and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
652called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
653@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
654indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
655to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
656@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
657
658The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
659specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
660was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
661command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
662archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
663the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
664
ff5dcc92 665See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
666archives multiple times.
667
668You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
669
670@ifset GENERIC
671This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 672if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
673behaviour of the AIX linker.
674@end ifset
675
676@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 677@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 678@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 679@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 680@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
681Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
682for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
683option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
684in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
685on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 686@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
687order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
688how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
689option is specified.
252b5132 690
3aa2d05a
NC
691If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
692prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
693@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 694
252b5132
RH
695@ifset UsesEnvVars
696The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 697@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
698some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
699@end ifset
700
701The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
702@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
703at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
704
705@cindex emulation
706@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 707@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
708Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
709emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
710
711If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
712@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
713
714Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
715configured.
716
717@cindex link map
718@kindex -M
719@kindex --print-map
720@item -M
721@itemx --print-map
722Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
723information about the link, including the following:
724
725@itemize @bullet
726@item
3b83e13a 727Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
728@item
729How common symbols are allocated.
730@item
731All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
732which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
733@item
734The values assigned to symbols.
735
736Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
737involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
738have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
739linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
740of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
741the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
742linker script containing:
743
744@smallexample
745 foo = 1
746 foo = foo * 4
747 foo = foo + 8
748@end smallexample
749
750will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
751option is used:
752
753@smallexample
754 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
755 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
757@end smallexample
758
759See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
760scripts.
252b5132
RH
761@end itemize
762
763@kindex -n
764@cindex read-only text
765@cindex NMAGIC
766@kindex --nmagic
767@item -n
768@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
769Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
770libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
771mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
772
773@kindex -N
774@kindex --omagic
775@cindex read/write from cmd line
776@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 777@item -N
252b5132
RH
778@itemx --omagic
779Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
780not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
781libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
782mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
783is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
784specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
785
786@kindex --no-omagic
787@cindex OMAGIC
788@item --no-omagic
789This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
790sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
791be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
792shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
793
794@kindex -o @var{output}
795@kindex --output=@var{output}
796@cindex naming the output file
797@item -o @var{output}
798@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 799Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
800option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
801script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
802
803@kindex -O @var{level}
804@cindex generating optimized output
805@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 806If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 807the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
808should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
809option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
810the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
811no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
812of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 813
387dd777
DP
814@kindex -plugin @var{name}
815@item -plugin @var{name}
816Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
817the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
818automatically added by the complier, when using link time
819optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
820wish.
821
822Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
823from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
824@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
825those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
826copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
827based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 828just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 829
26278bb8
UD
830@kindex --push-state
831@cindex push state governing input file handling
832@item --push-state
833The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
834flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
835restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
836
837The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
838@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
839@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
840@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
841@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
842@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
843
844One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
845used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
846listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
847something as follows:
848
849@smallexample
850-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
851@end smallexample
852
853@kindex --pop-state
854@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 855@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
a70f34c0
NC
929@kindex --strip-discarded
930@kindex --no-strip-discarded
931@item --strip-discarded
932@itemx --no-strip-discarded
933Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
934Enabled by default.
935
252b5132
RH
936@kindex -t
937@kindex --trace
938@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 939@item -t
252b5132 940@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 941Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
942
943@kindex -T @var{script}
944@kindex --script=@var{script}
945@cindex script files
946@item -T @var{scriptfile}
947@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
948Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 949@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 950@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
951output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
952the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
953specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
954options accumulate.
252b5132 955
14be8564
L
956@kindex -dT @var{script}
957@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
958@cindex script files
959@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
960@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
961Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
962
963This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
964processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
965command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
966@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
967behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
968command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
969the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
970@samp{gcc}).
971
252b5132
RH
972@kindex -u @var{symbol}
973@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
974@cindex undefined symbol
975@item -u @var{symbol}
976@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
977Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
978symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
979modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
980different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
981option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
982
0a618243
AB
983If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
984into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
985undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
986instead.
987
988@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
989@cindex symbols, require defined
990@cindex defined symbol
991@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
992Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
993is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
994is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
995and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
996@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
997can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
998
252b5132
RH
999@kindex -Ur
1000@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1001@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1002For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1003@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1004turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1005@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1006It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1007with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1008be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1009@samp{-r} for the others.
1010
c005eb9e
AB
1011@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1012@cindex orphan sections
1013@cindex sections, orphan
1014@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1015Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1016specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1017
1018@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1019
1020@table @code
1021@item place
1022Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1023the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1024@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1025
1026@item discard
1027All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1028@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1029
1030@item warn
1031The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1032issue a warning.
1033
1034@item error
1035The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1036@end table
1037
1038The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1039
577a0623
AM
1040@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1041@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1042Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1043@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1044missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1045specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1046multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1047input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1048in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1049
252b5132
RH
1050@kindex -v
1051@kindex -V
1052@kindex --version
1053@cindex version
1054@item -v
1055@itemx --version
1056@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1057Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1058lists the supported emulations.
1059
1060@kindex -x
1061@kindex --discard-all
1062@cindex deleting local symbols
1063@item -x
1064@itemx --discard-all
1065Delete all local symbols.
1066
1067@kindex -X
1068@kindex --discard-locals
1069@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1070@item -X
252b5132 1071@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1072Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1073system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1074or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1075
1076@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1077@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1078@cindex symbol tracing
1079@item -y @var{symbol}
1080@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1081Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1082option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1083to prepend an underscore.
1084
1085This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1086don't know where the reference is coming from.
1087
1088@kindex -Y @var{path}
1089@item -Y @var{path}
1090Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1091for Solaris compatibility.
1092
1093@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1094@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1095The recognized keywords are:
1096@table @samp
1097
e6e2dfbd
AM
1098@item bndplt
1099Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1100
1101@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1102@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1103@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1104@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1105Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1106to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1107@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1108@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1109@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1110@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1111Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1112
cd6d6c15 1113@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1114@itemx nocombreloc
1115Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1116dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1117
b8871f35 1118@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1119@itemx nocommon
1120Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1121link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1122
1123@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1124Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1125layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1126using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1127
cd6d6c15 1128@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1129Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1130is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1131This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1132
e6e2dfbd
AM
1133@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1134@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1135Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1136if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1137by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1138@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1139may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1140selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1141these options.
1142
6aa29e7b
JJ
1143@item execstack
1144Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1145
b039ef04
L
1146@item global
1147This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1148the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1149of subsequently loaded libraries.
1150
93ab9c0d
NC
1151@item globalaudit
1152This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1153This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1154setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1155tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1156the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command line options be run for
6c19b93b 1157all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1158
e6e2dfbd
AM
1159@item ibtplt
1160Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1161Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1162
8df93cb5 1163@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1164Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1165to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1166Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1167
cd6d6c15
NC
1168@item initfirst
1169This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1170It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1171before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1172the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1173the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1174objects.
1175
1176@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1177Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1178so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1179libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1180
5fa222e4
AM
1181@item lazy
1182When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1183dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1184the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1185Lazy binding is the default.
1186
cd6d6c15 1187@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1188Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1189
e6e2dfbd
AM
1190@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1191Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1192
e6e2dfbd
AM
1193@item muldefs
1194Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1195
cd6d6c15 1196@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1197Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1198defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1199
1200@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1201Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1202should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1203
1204@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1205Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1206
1207@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1208Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1209
1210@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1211Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1212
6aa29e7b
JJ
1213@item noexecstack
1214Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1215
e6e2dfbd
AM
1216@item noextern-protected-data
1217Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1218library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1219used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1220generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1221module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1222i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1223
e6e2dfbd
AM
1224@item noreloc-overflow
1225Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1226relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1227overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1228
cd6d6c15
NC
1229@item now
1230When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1231dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1232when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1233function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1234called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1235
1236@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1237Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1238
6aa29e7b 1239@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1240@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1241Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1242specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1243relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1244than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1245Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1246
47acac12
L
1247@item separate-code
1248@itemx noseparate-code
1249Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1250specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1251be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1252code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1253
e6e2dfbd
AM
1254@item shstk
1255Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1256to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1257Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1258
04c3a755 1259@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1260Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1261Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1262@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1263
e6e2dfbd
AM
1264@item text
1265@itemx notext
1266@itemx textoff
1267Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1268relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1269@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1270
97a232d7
NC
1271@item undefs
1272Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1273either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1274This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1275
cd6d6c15
NC
1276@end table
1277
ece2d90e 1278Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1279
1280@kindex -(
1281@cindex groups of archives
1282@item -( @var{archives} -)
1283@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1284The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1285either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1286
1287The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1288references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1289the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1290archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1291object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1292would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1293they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1294resolved.
1295
1296Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1297it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1298more archives.
1299
69da35b5
NC
1300@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1301@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1302@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1303@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1304Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1305recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1306and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1307the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1308behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1309so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1310restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1311
4a43e768
AM
1312@kindex --as-needed
1313@kindex --no-as-needed
1314@item --as-needed
1315@itemx --no-as-needed
1316This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1317on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1318the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1319on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1320needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1321emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1322non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1323the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1324non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1325Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1326the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1327needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1328from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1329
e56f61be
L
1330@kindex --add-needed
1331@kindex --no-add-needed
1332@item --add-needed
1333@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1334These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1335their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1336options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1337and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1338
252b5132
RH
1339@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1340@item -assert @var{keyword}
1341This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1342
1343@kindex -Bdynamic
1344@kindex -dy
1345@kindex -call_shared
1346@item -Bdynamic
1347@itemx -dy
1348@itemx -call_shared
1349Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1350for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1351default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1352for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1353multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1354@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1355
a1ab1d2a
UD
1356@kindex -Bgroup
1357@item -Bgroup
1358Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1359section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1360object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1361@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1362only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1363
252b5132
RH
1364@kindex -Bstatic
1365@kindex -dn
1366@kindex -non_shared
1367@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1368@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1369@itemx -dn
1370@itemx -non_shared
1371@itemx -static
1372Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1373platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1374variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1375may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1376library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1377option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1378option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1379shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1380references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1381libraries.
252b5132
RH
1382
1383@kindex -Bsymbolic
1384@item -Bsymbolic
1385When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1386definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1387for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1388within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1389@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1390executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1391the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1392support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1393
40b36307
L
1394@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1395@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1396When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1397symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1398This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1399when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1400to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1401This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1402libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1403
55255dae
L
1404@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1405@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1406Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1407typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1408global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1409within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1410to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1411in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1412which support shared libraries.
1413
1414The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1415scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1416
40b36307
L
1417@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1418@item --dynamic-list-data
1419Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1420
1421@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1422@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1423Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1424is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1425
0b8a70d9
L
1426@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1427@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1428Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1429
252b5132
RH
1430@kindex --check-sections
1431@kindex --no-check-sections
1432@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1433@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1434Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1435been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1436perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1437suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1438allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1439restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1440Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1441force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1442option.
252b5132 1443
ddbb8a31
NC
1444@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1445@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1446@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1447@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1448This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1449by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1450command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1451output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1452input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1453specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1454follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1455behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1456
1457This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1458libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1459mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1460their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1461required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1462the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1463dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1464symbols.
1465
252b5132
RH
1466@cindex cross reference table
1467@kindex --cref
1468@item --cref
1469Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1470generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1471Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1472
1473The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1474easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1475sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1476symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1477definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1478where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1479symbol are listed.
252b5132 1480
4818e05f
AM
1481@cindex common allocation
1482@kindex --no-define-common
1483@item --no-define-common
1484This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1485The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1486@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1487
1488The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1489the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1490of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1491forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1492Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1493from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1494This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1495and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1496duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1497paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1498
7bdf4127
AB
1499@cindex group allocation in linker script
1500@cindex section groups
1501@cindex COMDAT
1502@kindex --force-group-allocation
1503@item --force-group-allocation
1504This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1505normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1506default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1507change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1508command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1509effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1510
252b5132 1511@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1512@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1513@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1514Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1515address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1516times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1517limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1518context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1519symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1520constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1521using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1522@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1523equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1524
1525@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1526@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1527@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1528@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1529@itemx --no-demangle
1530These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1531and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1532present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1533underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1534mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1535different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1536to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1537demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1538is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1539
1540@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1541@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1542@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1543@item -I@var{file}
1544@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1545Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1546generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1547linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1548doing.
1549
9b8b325a
RF
1550@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1551@item --no-dynamic-linker
1552When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1553linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1554executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1555entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1556
a70f34c0
NC
1557@kindex --embedded-relocs
1558@item --embedded-relocs
1559This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1560that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1561is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1562targets.
1563
3f0a5f17
ME
1564@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1565@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1566Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1567in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1568
7ce691ae 1569@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1570@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1571@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1572@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1573Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1574with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1575
252b5132
RH
1576@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1577@item --force-exe-suffix
1578Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1579
1580If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1581@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1582the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1583option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1584Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1585it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1586
1587@kindex --gc-sections
1588@kindex --no-gc-sections
1589@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1590@item --gc-sections
1591@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1592Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1593targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1594performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1595@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1596collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1597implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1598
d5465ba2
AM
1599@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1600examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1601symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1602command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1603referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1604libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1605referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1606the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1607relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1608
ac69cbc6 1609This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1610@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1611specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1612a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1613
c17d87de
NC
1614@kindex --print-gc-sections
1615@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1616@cindex garbage collection
1617@item --print-gc-sections
1618@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1619List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1620printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1621collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1622default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1623be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1624line.
1625
22185505 1626@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1627@cindex garbage collection
1628@item --gc-keep-exported
1629When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1630collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1631default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1632executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1633collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1634Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1635it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1636ELF format targets.
1637
30824704
RM
1638@kindex --print-output-format
1639@cindex output format
1640@item --print-output-format
1641Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1642other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1643in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1644
3604cb1f
TG
1645@kindex --print-memory-usage
1646@cindex memory usage
1647@item --print-memory-usage
1648Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1649the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1650quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1651headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1652parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1653
1654@smallexample
1655Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1656 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1657 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1658@end smallexample
1659
252b5132
RH
1660@cindex help
1661@cindex usage
1662@kindex --help
1663@item --help
1664Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1665
ea20a7da
CC
1666@kindex --target-help
1667@item --target-help
1668Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1669
2509a395
SL
1670@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1671@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1672Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1673@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1674
1675@cindex memory usage
1676@kindex --no-keep-memory
1677@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1678@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1679symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1680instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1681necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1682while linking a large executable.
1683
1684@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1685@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1686@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1687@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1688@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1689Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1690is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1691The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1692behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1693libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1694
97a232d7
NC
1695The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1696
aa713662
L
1697@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1698@kindex -z muldefs
1699@item --allow-multiple-definition
1700@itemx -z muldefs
1701Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1702report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1703first definition will be used.
1704
b79e8c78 1705@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1706@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1707@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1708@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1709Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1710This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1711determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1712shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1713how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1714
903249d7
NC
1715The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1716referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1717an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1718a shared library.
1719
1720The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1721libraries specified at link time are that:
1722
1723@itemize @bullet
1724@item
1725A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1726that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1727resolvable at load time.
1728@item
1729There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1730symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1731
1732The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1733select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1734architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1735appropriate memset function.
1736@end itemize
b79e8c78 1737
31941635
L
1738@kindex --no-undefined-version
1739@item --no-undefined-version
1740Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1741it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1742will be issued instead.
1743
3e3b46e5
PB
1744@kindex --default-symver
1745@item --default-symver
1746Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1747exported symbols.
1748
1749@kindex --default-imported-symver
1750@item --default-imported-symver
1751Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1752imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1753
252b5132
RH
1754@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1755@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1756Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1757files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1758been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1759This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1760errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1761have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1762inappropriate.
1763
fe7929ce
AM
1764@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1765@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1766Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1767library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1768
252b5132
RH
1769@kindex --no-whole-archive
1770@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1771Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1772archive files.
1773
1774@cindex output file after errors
1775@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1776@item --noinhibit-exec
1777Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1778Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1779errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1780when it issues any error whatsoever.
1781
0a9c1c8e
CD
1782@kindex -nostdlib
1783@item -nostdlib
1784Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1785command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1786(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1787
252b5132 1788@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1789@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1790@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1791@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1792file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1793@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1794object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1795object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1796should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1797usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1798name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1799list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1800command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1801this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1802@end ifclear
1803
76359541
TP
1804@kindex --out-implib
1805@item --out-implib @var{file}
1806Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1807the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1808library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1809may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1810behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1811step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1812the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1813
36af4a4e
JJ
1814@kindex -pie
1815@kindex --pic-executable
1816@item -pie
1817@itemx --pic-executable
1818@cindex position independent executables
1819Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1820ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1821libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1822address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1823normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1824defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1825
252b5132
RH
1826@kindex -qmagic
1827@item -qmagic
1828This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1829
1830@kindex -Qy
1831@item -Qy
1832This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1833
1834@kindex --relax
1835@cindex synthesizing linker
1836@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1837@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1838@item --relax
28d5f677 1839@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1840An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1841@ifset GENERIC
1842This option is only supported on a few targets.
1843@end ifset
1844@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1845@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1846@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1847@ifset XTENSA
1848@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1849@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1850@ifset M68HC11
1851@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1852@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1853@ifset NIOSII
1854@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1855@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1856@ifset POWERPC
1857@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1858@end ifset
252b5132 1859
28d5f677
NC
1860On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1861global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1862addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1863synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1864instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1865
1866On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1867debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1868@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1869This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1870family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1871@end ifset
1872
1873@ifset GENERIC
1874On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1875but ignored.
1876@end ifset
1877
28d5f677
NC
1878On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1879@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1880
252b5132
RH
1881@cindex retaining specified symbols
1882@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1883@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1884@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1885@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1886Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1887discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1888symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1889@ifset GENERIC
1890(such as VxWorks)
1891@end ifset
1892where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1893run-time memory.
1894
1895@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1896or symbols needed for relocations.
1897
1898You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1899line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1900
1901@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1902@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1903@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1904@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1905Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1906linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1907arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1908them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1909also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1910objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1911@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1912ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1913@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1914
ff5dcc92 1915The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1916SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1917@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1918runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1919options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1920gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1921file systems.
252b5132 1922
ff5dcc92 1923For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1924followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1925the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1926@end ifset
1927
1928@ifset GENERIC
1929@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1930@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1931@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1932When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1933happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1934of the input files.
1935
1936When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1937non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1938shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1939explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1940specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1941@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1942either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1943appearing multiple times.
1944
e680a6b6
NC
1945The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1946directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1947containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1948and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
194964-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1950
1951The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1952@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1953supported.
1954
28c309a2
NC
1955This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1956that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1957is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1958runtime linker would do.
1959
252b5132 1960The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1961libraries:
252b5132
RH
1962@enumerate
1963@item
ff5dcc92 1964Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1965@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1966Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1967between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1968specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1969used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1970at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1971by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1972the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1973@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1974On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1975@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1976environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1977@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1978On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1979directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1980@item
a1b8d843 1981For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1982variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1983@item
ec4eb78a
L
1984For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1985@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1986libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1987@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1988@item
252b5132
RH
1989The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1990@item
1991For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1992exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1993@end enumerate
1994
1995If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1996warning and continue with the link.
1997@end ifset
1998
1999@kindex -shared
2000@kindex -Bshareable
2001@item -shared
2002@itemx -Bshareable
2003@cindex shared libraries
2004Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2005and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2006shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2007undefined symbols in the link.
2008
252b5132 2009@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2010@item --sort-common
2011@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2012@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2013This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2014ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2015sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2016eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2017between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2018specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2019
2509a395
SL
2020@kindex --sort-section=name
2021@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2022This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2023patterns in the linker script.
2024
2509a395
SL
2025@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2026@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2027This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2028patterns in the linker script.
2029
a70f34c0
NC
2030@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2031@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2032This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2033.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2034post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2035
252b5132 2036@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2037@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2038Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2039each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2040size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2041
2042@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2043@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2044Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2045output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2046This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2047certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2048cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2049that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2050support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2051input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2052more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2053many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2054
2055@kindex --stats
2056@item --stats
2057Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2058as execution time and memory usage.
2059
2509a395 2060@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2061@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2062Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2063configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2064that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2065
a70f34c0
NC
2066@kindex --task-link
2067@item --task-link
2068This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2069file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2070
252b5132
RH
2071@kindex --traditional-format
2072@cindex traditional format
2073@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2074For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2075the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2076use the traditional format instead.
2077
2078@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2079For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2080symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2081full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2082@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2083trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2084combine duplicate entries.
2085
2509a395
SL
2086@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2087@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2088Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2089address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2090times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2091line.
2092@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2093for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2094@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2095should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2096sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2097
2509a395
SL
2098@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2099@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2100@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2101@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2102@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2103@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2104@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2105Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2106@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2107
2509a395
SL
2108@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2109@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2110@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2111When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2112byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2113
9d5777a3
RM
2114@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2115@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2116@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2117When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2118the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2119text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2120
0d705e9f
AM
2121@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2122@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2123@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2124When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2125model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2126
560e09e9
NC
2127@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2128@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2129Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2130values for @samp{method}:
2131
2132@table @samp
2133@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2134Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2135
2136@item report-all
da8bce14 2137Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2138
2139@item ignore-in-object-files
2140Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2141ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2142
2143@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2144Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2145ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2146when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2147libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2148command line.
2149@end table
2150
2151The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2152by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2153
2154Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2155unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2156can change this to a warning.
2157
1715a13c
L
2158@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2159@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2160@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2161@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2162Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2163supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2164the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2165argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2166
2167@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2168@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2169@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2170Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2171used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2172about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2173is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2174see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2175use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2176symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2177@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2178
7ce691ae 2179@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2180@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2181@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2182@item --warn-common
2183Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2184a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2185but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2186you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2187Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2188warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2189
2190There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2191
2192@table @samp
2193@item int i = 1;
2194A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2195file.
2196
2197@item extern int i;
2198An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2199There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2200variable somewhere.
2201
2202@item int i;
2203A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2204variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2205The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2206single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2207size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2208a definition of the same variable.
2209@end table
2210
2211The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2212Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2213just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2214encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2215a common symbol.
2216
2217@enumerate
2218@item
2219Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2220definition for the symbol.
2221@smallexample
2222@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2223 overridden by definition
2224@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2225@end smallexample
2226
2227@item
2228Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2229the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2230except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2231@smallexample
2232@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2233 overriding common
2234@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2235@end smallexample
2236
2237@item
2238Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2239@smallexample
2240@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2241 of `@var{symbol}'
2242@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2243@end smallexample
2244
2245@item
2246Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2247@smallexample
2248@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2249 overridden by larger common
2250@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2251@end smallexample
2252
2253@item
2254Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2255the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2256encountered in a different order.
2257@smallexample
2258@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2259 overriding smaller common
2260@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2261@end smallexample
2262@end enumerate
2263
2264@kindex --warn-constructors
2265@item --warn-constructors
2266Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2267object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2268detect the use of global constructors.
2269
2270@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2271@item --warn-multiple-gp
2272Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2273This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2274Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2275section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2276of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2277base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2278base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2279bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2280large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2281values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2282option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2283
2284@kindex --warn-once
2285@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2286@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2287@item --warn-once
2288Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2289which refers to it.
2290
2291@kindex --warn-section-align
2292@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2293@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2294@item --warn-section-align
2295Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2296alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2297The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2298is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2299the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2300
8fdd7217
NC
2301@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2302@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2303Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2304
a0c402a5
L
2305@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2306@item --warn-alternate-em
2307Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2308
560e09e9
NC
2309@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2310@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2311If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2312@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2313This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2314
2315@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2316@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2317This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2318it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2319
252b5132
RH
2320@kindex --whole-archive
2321@cindex including an entire archive
2322@item --whole-archive
2323For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2324@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2325in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2326files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2327library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2328library. This option may be used more than once.
2329
7ec229ce 2330Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2331about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2332Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2333list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2334your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2335
2509a395
SL
2336@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2337@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2338Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2339@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2340undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2341@var{symbol}.
2342
2343This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2344wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2345wishes to call the system function, it should call
2346@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2347
2348Here is a trivial example:
2349
2350@smallexample
2351void *
cc2f008e 2352__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2353@{
cc2f008e 2354 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2355 return __real_malloc (c);
2356@}
2357@end smallexample
2358
ff5dcc92 2359If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2360all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2361instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2362call the real @code{malloc} function.
2363
2364You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2365links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2366you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2367file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2368call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2369
6aa29e7b 2370@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2371@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2372@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2373@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2374Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2375(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2376section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2377
e41b3a13
JJ
2378@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2379@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2380Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2381generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2382if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2383
6c1439be
L
2384@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2385@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2386@item --enable-new-dtags
2387@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2388This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2389systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2390@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2391and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2392If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2393created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2394those options are only available for ELF systems.
2395
2d643429 2396@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2397@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2398Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2399close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2400time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2401increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2402value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2403
fdc90cb4
JJ
2404@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2405@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2406Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2407@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2408new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2409the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2410hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2411
0ce398f1
L
2412@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2413@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2414@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2415@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2416@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2417@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2418@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2419@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2420On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2421compressed using zlib.
2422
2423@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2424sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2425DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2426instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2427also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2428sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2429
2430The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2431@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2432
2433Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2434sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2435for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2436uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2437
2438The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2439involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2440default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2441@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2442
35835446
JR
2443@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2444@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2445This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2446linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2447for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2448about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2449
4f9c04f7 2450Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 24511021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2452run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2453has been used.
2454
2455The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2456enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2457
c0065db7
RM
2458@kindex --build-id
2459@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2460@item --build-id
2461@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2462Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2463or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2464unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2465@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2466@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2467@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2468the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2469string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2470@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2471is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2472
2473The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2474that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2475unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2476to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2477file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2478string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2479
2480Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2481@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2482@end table
2483
0285c67d
NC
2484@c man end
2485
36f63dca 2486@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2487
0285c67d
NC
2488@c man begin OPTIONS
2489
ff5dcc92 2490The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2491the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2492normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2493use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2494@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2495like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2496symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2497object file).
2498
2499In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2500support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2501PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2502values by either a space or an equals sign.
2503
ff5dcc92 2504@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2505
2506@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2507@item --add-stdcall-alias
2508If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2509as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2510[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2511
2512@kindex --base-file
2513@item --base-file @var{file}
2514Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2515addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2516@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2517[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2518
2519@kindex --dll
2520@item --dll
2521Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2522@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2523file.
bb10df36 2524[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2525
88183869
DK
2526@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2527@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2528@item --enable-long-section-names
2529@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2530The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2531the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2532for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2533fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2534to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2535allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2536disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2537generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2538as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2539with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2540GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2541information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2542option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2543section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2544when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2545image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2546[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2547
252b5132
RH
2548@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2549@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2550@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2551@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2552If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2553do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2554only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2555resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2556undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2557@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2558to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2559warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2560import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2561to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2562feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2563@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2564mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2565[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2566
522f09cd
KT
2567@kindex --leading-underscore
2568@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2569@item --leading-underscore
2570@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2571For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2572in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2573disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2574
252b5132
RH
2575@cindex DLLs, creating
2576@kindex --export-all-symbols
2577@item --export-all-symbols
2578If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2579be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2580otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2581explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2582attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2583option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2584@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2585@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2586exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2587re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2588such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2589@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2590@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2591Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2592not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2593extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2594(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2595These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2596@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2597@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2598@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2599@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2600[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2601
2602@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2603@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2604Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2605exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2606[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2607
2927aaca
NC
2608@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2609@item --exclude-all-symbols
2610Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2611[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2612
252b5132
RH
2613@kindex --file-alignment
2614@item --file-alignment
2615Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2616file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2617512.
bb10df36 2618[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2619
2620@cindex heap size
2621@kindex --heap
2622@item --heap @var{reserve}
2623@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2624Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2625to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2626committed.
bb10df36 2627[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2628
2629@cindex image base
2630@kindex --image-base
2631@item --image-base @var{value}
2632Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2633the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2634is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2635your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2636other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2637for dlls.
bb10df36 2638[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2639
2640@kindex --kill-at
2641@item --kill-at
2642If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2643symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2644[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2645
26d2d8a2
BF
2646@kindex --large-address-aware
2647@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2648If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2649header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2650greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2651or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2652section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2653[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2654
f69a2f97
NC
2655@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2656@item --disable-large-address-aware
2657Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2658This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2659driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2660addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2661[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2662
252b5132
RH
2663@kindex --major-image-version
2664@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2665Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2666[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2667
2668@kindex --major-os-version
2669@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2670Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2671[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2672
2673@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2674@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2675Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2676[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2677
2678@kindex --minor-image-version
2679@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2680Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2681[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2682
2683@kindex --minor-os-version
2684@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2685Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2686[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2687
2688@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2689@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2690Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2691[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2692
2693@cindex DEF files, creating
2694@cindex DLLs, creating
2695@kindex --output-def
2696@item --output-def @var{file}
2697The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2698file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2699(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2700library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2701automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2702[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2703
b044cda1 2704@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2705@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2706@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2707@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2708Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2709@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2710By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2711for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2712execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2713[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2714
2715@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2716@item --disable-auto-image-base
2717Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2718user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2719default.
bb10df36 2720[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2721
2722@cindex DLLs, linking to
2723@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2724@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2725When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2726search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2727@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2728between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2729uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2730@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2731[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2732
2733@kindex --enable-auto-import
2734@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2735Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2736DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2737mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2738[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2739
2740The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2741feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2742
2743Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2744of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2745PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2746
e2a83dd0
NC
2747Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2748data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2749placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2750around a problem with consts that is described here:
2751http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2752
4d8907ac
DS
2753Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2754see this message:
0d888aac 2755
ece2d90e 2756"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2757documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2758
ece2d90e
NC
2759This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2760ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2761allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2762fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2763constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2764multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2765this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2766of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2767the warning, and exit.
2768
2769There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2770data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2771
2fa9fc65
NC
2772One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2773of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2774this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2775
c0065db7
RM
2776A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2777that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2778there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2779a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2780
2781@example
2782extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2783extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2784 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2785@end example
2786
2787or
2788
2789@example
2790extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2791extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2792 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2793@end example
2794
c0065db7 2795For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2796is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2797
2798@example
2799extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2800extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2801 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2802@end example
2803
c406afaf
NC
2804or
2805
2806@example
2807extern long long extern_ll;
2808extern_ll -->
2809 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2810@end example
2811
2fa9fc65 2812A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2813'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2814@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2815requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2816building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2817merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2818between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2819constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2820
2821Original:
2822@example
2823--foo.h
2824extern int arr[];
2825--foo.c
2826#include "foo.h"
2827void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2828 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2829@}
2830@end example
2831
2832Solution 1:
2833@example
2834--foo.h
2835extern int arr[];
2836--foo.c
2837#include "foo.h"
2838void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2839 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2840 volatile int *parr = arr;
2841 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2842@}
2843@end example
2844
2845Solution 2:
2846@example
2847--foo.h
2848/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2849#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2850 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2851#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2852#else
2853#define FOO_IMPORT
2854#endif
2855extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2856--foo.c
2857#include "foo.h"
2858void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2859 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2860@}
2861@end example
2862
c0065db7 2863A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2864library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2865for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2866functions).
b044cda1
CW
2867
2868@kindex --disable-auto-import
2869@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2870Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2871@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2872[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2873
2fa9fc65
NC
2874@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2875@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2876If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2877that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2878a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2879environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2880[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2881
2882@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2883@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2884Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2885[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2886
b044cda1
CW
2887@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2888@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2889Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2890[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2891
252b5132
RH
2892@kindex --section-alignment
2893@item --section-alignment
2894Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2895addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2896[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2897
2898@cindex stack size
2899@kindex --stack
2900@item --stack @var{reserve}
2901@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2902Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2903to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2904committed.
bb10df36 2905[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2906
2907@kindex --subsystem
2908@item --subsystem @var{which}
2909@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2910@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2911Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2912legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2913@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2914the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2915@var{which}.
bb10df36 2916[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2917
2f563b51
DK
2918The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2919of the PE file header:
2920[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2921
2d5c3743
NC
2922@kindex --high-entropy-va
2923@item --high-entropy-va
2924Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2925(ASLR).
2926
2f563b51
DK
2927@kindex --dynamicbase
2928@item --dynamicbase
2929The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2930randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2931Vista for i386 PE targets.
2932
2933@kindex --forceinteg
2934@item --forceinteg
2935Code integrity checks are enforced.
2936
2937@kindex --nxcompat
2938@item --nxcompat
2939The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2940This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2941
2942@kindex --no-isolation
2943@item --no-isolation
2944Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2945
2946@kindex --no-seh
2947@item --no-seh
2948The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2949this image.
2950
2951@kindex --no-bind
2952@item --no-bind
2953Do not bind this image.
2954
2955@kindex --wdmdriver
2956@item --wdmdriver
2957The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2958
2f563b51
DK
2959@kindex --tsaware
2960@item --tsaware
2961The image is Terminal Server aware.
2962
0cb112f7
CF
2963@kindex --insert-timestamp
2964@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2965@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2966Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2967as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2968other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2969will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2970same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2971can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2972that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2973identically.
252b5132
RH
2974@end table
2975
0285c67d
NC
2976@c man end
2977
ac145307
BS
2978@ifset C6X
2979@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2980
2981@c man begin OPTIONS
2982
2983The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2984libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2985all executables use an index of 0.
2986
2987@table @gcctabopt
2988
2989@kindex --dsbt-size
2990@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2991This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2992or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2993entries.
2994
2995@kindex --dsbt-index
2996@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2997This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2998to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2999executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3000@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3001
fbd9ad90
PB
3002@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3003The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3004exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3005
ac145307
BS
3006@end table
3007
3008@c man end
3009@end ifset
3010
93fd0973
SC
3011@ifset M68HC11
3012@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3013
3014@c man begin OPTIONS
3015
3016The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3017memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3018
3019@table @gcctabopt
3020
3021@kindex --no-trampoline
3022@item --no-trampoline
3023This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3024is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3025instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3026
3027@kindex --bank-window
3028@item --bank-window @var{name}
3029This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3030the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3031The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3032paging and addresses within the memory window.
3033
3034@end table
3035
3036@c man end
3037@end ifset
3038
7fb9f789
NC
3039@ifset M68K
3040@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3041
3042@c man begin OPTIONS
3043
3044The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3045when linking for 68K targets.
3046
3047@table @gcctabopt
3048
3049@kindex --got
3050@item --got=@var{type}
3051This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3052@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3053@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3054Info entry for @file{ld}.
3055
3056@end table
3057
3058@c man end
3059@end ifset
3060
833794fc
MR
3061@ifset MIPS
3062@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3063
3064@c man begin OPTIONS
3065
3066The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3067generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3068linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3069
3070@table @gcctabopt
3071
3072@kindex --insn32
3073@item --insn32
3074@kindex --no-insn32
3075@itemx --no-insn32
3076These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3077generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3078or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
307932-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3080used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3081possible.
3082
8b10b0b3
MR
3083@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3084@item --ignore-branch-isa
3085@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3086@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3087These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3088transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3089accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3090is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3091instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3092equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3093calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3094a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3095an error.
3096
833794fc
MR
3097@end table
3098
3099@c man end
3100@end ifset
3101
252b5132
RH
3102@ifset UsesEnvVars
3103@node Environment
3104@section Environment Variables
3105
0285c67d
NC
3106@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3107
560e09e9 3108You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3109@ifclear SingleFormat
3110@code{GNUTARGET},
3111@end ifclear
3112@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3113
36f63dca 3114@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3115@kindex GNUTARGET
3116@cindex default input format
3117@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3118use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3119of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3120@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3121of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3122attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3123this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3124there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3125object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3126BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3127in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3128@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3129
3130@kindex LDEMULATION
3131@cindex default emulation
3132@cindex emulation, default
3133@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3134@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3135behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3136available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3137the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3138variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3139linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3140
3141@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3142@cindex demangling, default
3143Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3144@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3145default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3146a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3147may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3148options.
3149
0285c67d
NC
3150@c man end
3151@end ifset
3152
252b5132
RH
3153@node Scripts
3154@chapter Linker Scripts
3155
3156@cindex scripts
3157@cindex linker scripts
3158@cindex command files
3159Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3160written in the linker command language.
3161
3162The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3163the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3164the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3165more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3166direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3167described below.
3168
3169The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3170yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3171linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3172to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3173such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3174
3175You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3176line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3177default linker script.
3178
3179You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3180to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3181Linker Scripts}.
3182
3183@menu
3184* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3185* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3186* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3187* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3188* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3189* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3190* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3191* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3192* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3193* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3194* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3195@end menu
3196
3197@node Basic Script Concepts
3198@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3199@cindex linker script concepts
3200We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3201describe the linker script language.
3202
3203The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3204file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3205@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3206The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3207purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3208among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3209section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3210in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3211
3212Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3213also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3214contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3215the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3216A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3217area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3218loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3219which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3220of debugging information.
3221
3222Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3223first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3224the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3225@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3226section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3227same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3228is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3229(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3230based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3231RAM address would be the VMA.
3232
3233You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3234program with the @samp{-h} option.
3235
3236Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3237@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3238has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3239information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3240will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3241static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3242referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3243
3244You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3245program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3246option.
3247
3248@node Script Format
3249@section Linker Script Format
3250@cindex linker script format
3251Linker scripts are text files.
3252
3253You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3254either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3255symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3256generally ignored.
3257
3258Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3259If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3260otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3261double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3262file name.
3263
3264You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3265@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3266to whitespace.
3267
3268@node Simple Example
3269@section Simple Linker Script Example
3270@cindex linker script example
3271@cindex example of linker script
3272Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3273
3274The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3275@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3276memory layout of the output file.
3277
3278The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3279describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3280code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3281@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3282Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3283your input files.
3284
3285For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32860x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3287linker script which will do that:
3288@smallexample
3289SECTIONS
3290@{
3291 . = 0x10000;
3292 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3293 . = 0x8000000;
3294 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3295 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3296@}
3297@end smallexample
3298
3299You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3300followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3301descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3302
252b5132
RH
3303The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3304sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3305counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3306other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3307current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3308incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3309@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3310
3311The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3312required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3313after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3314which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3315wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3316means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3317
3318Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3319@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3320@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3321
3322The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3323the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3324at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3325output section, the value of the location counter will be
3326@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3327effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3328immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3329
3330The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3331alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3332example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3333sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3334may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3335sections.
3336
3337That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3338
3339@node Simple Commands
3340@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3341@cindex linker script simple commands
3342In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3343
3344@menu
3345* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3346* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3347@ifclear SingleFormat
3348* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3349@end ifclear
3350
4a93e180 3351* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3352* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3353@end menu
3354
3355@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3356@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3357@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3358@cindex start of execution
3359@cindex first instruction
3360@cindex entry point
3361The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3362point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3363entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3364@smallexample
3365ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3366@end smallexample
3367
3368There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3369entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3370stopping when one of them succeeds:
3371@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3372@item
252b5132 3373the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3374@item
252b5132 3375the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3376@item
3ab904c4
NC
3377the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3378targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3379check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3380@item
252b5132 3381the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3382@item
252b5132
RH
3383The address @code{0}.
3384@end itemize
3385
3386@node File Commands
36f63dca 3387@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3388@cindex linker script file commands
3389Several linker script commands deal with files.
3390
3391@table @code
3392@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3393@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3394@cindex including a linker script
3395Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3396be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3397with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
339810 levels deep.
3399
4006703d
NS
3400You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3401@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3402
252b5132
RH
3403@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3404@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3405@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3406@cindex input files in linker scripts
3407@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3408@cindex linker script input object files
3409The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3410in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3411
3412For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3413a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3414then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3415
3416In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3417script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3418
e3f2db7f
AO
3419In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3420with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3421located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3422for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3423open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3424linker will search through the archive library search path.
3425The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3426as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3427path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3428@ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3429
ff5dcc92 3430If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3431name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3432@samp{-l}.
3433
3434When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3435files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3436script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3437
3438@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3439@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3440@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3441@cindex grouping input files
3442The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3443files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3444new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3445in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3446
b717d30e
JJ
3447@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3448@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3449@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3450This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3451commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3452as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3453with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3454when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3455@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3456and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3457setting afterwards.
3458
252b5132
RH
3459@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3460@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3461@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3462The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3463@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3464@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3465Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3466precedence.
3467
3468You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3469output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3470
3471@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3472@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3473@cindex library search path in linker script
3474@cindex archive search path in linker script
3475@cindex search path in linker script
3476The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3477@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3478@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3479on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3480are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3481the command line option are searched first.
3482
3483@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3484@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3485@cindex first input file
3486The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3487that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3488though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3489when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3490first file.
3491@end table
3492
3493@ifclear SingleFormat
3494@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3495@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3496A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3497
3498@table @code
3499@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3500@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3501@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3502@cindex output file format in linker script
3503The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3504output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3505exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3506(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3507line option takes precedence.
3508
3509You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3510formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3511This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3512desired endianness.
3513
3514If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3515will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3516output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3517used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3518
3519For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3520command:
3521@smallexample
3522OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3523@end smallexample
3524This says that the default format for the output file is
3525@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3526option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3527format.
3528
3529@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3530@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3531@cindex input file format in linker script
3532The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3533files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3534This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3535(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3536is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3537command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3538@end table
3539@end ifclear
3540
4a93e180
NC
3541@node REGION_ALIAS
3542@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3543@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3544@cindex region alias
3545@cindex region names
3546
3547Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3548@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3549
3550@smallexample
3551REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3552@end smallexample
3553
3554The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3555memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3556to memory regions. An example follows.
3557
3558Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3559memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3560that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3561non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3562access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3563read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3564sections:
3565
3566@itemize @bullet
3567@item
3568@code{.text} program code;
3569@item
3570@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3571@item
3572@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3573@item
3574@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3575@end itemize
3576
3577The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3578part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3579output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3580systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3581@code{C}:
3582@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3583@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3584@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3585@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3586@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3587@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3588@end multitable
3589The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3590loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3591the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3592the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3593
3594The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3595includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3596memory layout:
3597@smallexample
3598INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3599
3600SECTIONS
3601 @{
3602 .text :
3603 @{
3604 *(.text)
3605 @} > REGION_TEXT
3606 .rodata :
3607 @{
3608 *(.rodata)
3609 rodata_end = .;
3610 @} > REGION_RODATA
3611 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3612 @{
3613 data_start = .;
3614 *(.data)
3615 @} > REGION_DATA
3616 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3617 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3618 .bss :
3619 @{
3620 *(.bss)
3621 @} > REGION_BSS
3622 @}
3623@end smallexample
3624
3625Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3626regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3627variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3628@table @code
3629@item A
3630Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3631@smallexample
3632MEMORY
3633 @{
3634 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3635 @}
3636
3637REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3638REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3639REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3640REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3641@end smallexample
3642@item B
3643Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3644into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3645@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3646@smallexample
3647MEMORY
3648 @{
3649 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3650 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3651 @}
3652
3653REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3654REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3655REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3656REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3657@end smallexample
3658@item C
3659Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3660@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3661initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3662system start into the @code{RAM}.
3663@smallexample
3664MEMORY
3665 @{
3666 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3667 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3668 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3669 @}
3670
3671REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3672REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3673REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3674REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3675@end smallexample
3676@end table
3677
3678It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3679@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3680necessary:
3681@smallexample
3682#include <string.h>
3683
3684extern char data_start [];
3685extern char data_size [];
3686extern char data_load_start [];
3687
3688void copy_data(void)
3689@{
3690 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3691 @{
3692 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3693 @}
3694@}
3695@end smallexample
3696
252b5132 3697@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3698@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3699There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3700
3701@table @code
3702@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3703@kindex ASSERT
3704@cindex assertion in linker script
3705Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3706with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3707
fd1c4238
NC
3708Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3709take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3710inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3711for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3712symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3713
3714@smallexample
3715 .stack :
3716 @{
3717 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3718 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3719 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3720 @}
3721@end smallexample
3722
3723will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3724PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3725can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3726
3727@smallexample
3728 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3729 .stack :
3730 @{
3731 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3732 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3733 @}
3734@end smallexample
3735
3736will work.
3737
252b5132
RH
3738@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3739@kindex EXTERN
3740@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3741Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3742symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3743modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3744each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3745command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3746
3747@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3748@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3749@cindex common allocation in linker script
3750This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3751to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3752output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3753
4818e05f
AM
3754@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3755@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3756@cindex common allocation in linker script
3757This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3758command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3759to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3760
7bdf4127
AB
3761@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3762@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3763@cindex group allocation in linker script
3764@cindex section groups
3765@cindex COMDAT
3766This command has the same effect as the
3767@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3768@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3769and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3770specified (@samp{-r}).
3771
53d25da6
AM
3772@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3773@kindex INSERT
3774@cindex insert user script into default script
3775This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3776augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3777inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3778@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3779default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3780sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3781linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3782insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3783linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3784default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3785of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3786to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3787is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3788
3789@smallexample
3790SECTIONS
3791@{
3792 OVERLAY :
3793 @{
3794 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3795 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3796 @}
3797@}
3798INSERT AFTER .text;
3799@end smallexample
3800
252b5132
RH
3801@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3802@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3803@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3804This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3805references among certain output sections.
3806
3807In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3808using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3809will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3810errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3811a function defined in the other section.
3812
3813The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3814@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3815an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3816@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3817names.
3818
cdf96953
MF
3819@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3820@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3821@cindex cross references
3822This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3823references to one section from a list of other sections.
3824
3825The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3826output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3827a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3828there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3829must never call back.
3830
3831The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3832The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3833If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3834the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3835status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3836names, not input section names.
3837
252b5132
RH
3838@ifclear SingleFormat
3839@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3840@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3841@cindex machine architecture
3842@cindex architecture
3843Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3844of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3845architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3846the @samp{-f} option.
3847@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3848
3849@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3850@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3851This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3852@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3853in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3854@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3855@end table
3856
3857@node Assignments
3858@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3859@cindex assignment in scripts
3860@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3861@cindex variables, defining
3862You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3863the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3864
3865@menu
3866* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3867* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3868* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3869* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3870* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3871@end menu
3872
3873@node Simple Assignments
3874@subsection Simple Assignments
3875
3876You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3877
3878@table @code
3879@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3880@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3881@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3882@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3883@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3884@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3885@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3886@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3887@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3888@end table
3889
3890The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3891@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3892defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3893
3894The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3895may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3896
3897The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3898
3899Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3900
3901You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3902statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3903section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3904
3905The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3906expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3907
3908Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3909assignments may be used:
3910
3911@smallexample
3912floating_point = 0;
3913SECTIONS
3914@{
3915 .text :
3916 @{
3917 *(.text)
3918 _etext = .;
3919 @}
156e34dd 3920 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3921 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3922@}
3923@end smallexample
3924@noindent
3925In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3926zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3927the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3928defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3929upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3930
eb8476a6
MR
3931@node HIDDEN
3932@subsection HIDDEN
3933@cindex HIDDEN
3934For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3935exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3936
3937Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3938@code{HIDDEN}:
3939
3940@smallexample
3941HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3942SECTIONS
3943@{
3944 .text :
3945 @{
3946 *(.text)
3947 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3948 @}
3949 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3950 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3951@}
3952@end smallexample
3953@noindent
3954In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3955
252b5132
RH
3956@node PROVIDE
3957@subsection PROVIDE
3958@cindex PROVIDE
3959In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3960only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3961the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3962@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3963@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3964@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3965@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3966@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3967
3968Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3969@smallexample
3970SECTIONS
3971@{
3972 .text :
3973 @{
3974 *(.text)
3975 _etext = .;
3976 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3977 @}
3978@}
3979@end smallexample
3980
3981In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3982underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3983the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3984underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3985If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3986linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3987
b0daac83
NC
3988Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
3989defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
3990that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
3991when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
3992@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
3993
7af8e998
L
3994@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3995@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3996@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3997Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3998hidden and won't be exported.
3999
73ae6183
NC
4000@node Source Code Reference
4001@subsection Source Code Reference
4002
4003Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4004intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4005a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4006symbol that does not have a value.
4007
4008Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4009transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4010stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4011prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4012mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4013of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4014variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4015linker script variable might be referred to as:
4016
4017@smallexample
4018 extern int foo;
4019@end smallexample
4020
4021But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4022
4023@smallexample
4024 _foo = 1000;
4025@end smallexample
4026
4027In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4028transformation has taken place.
4029
4030When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4031things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4032in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4033second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4034table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4035contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4036value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4037
4038@smallexample
4039 int foo = 1000;
4040@end smallexample
4041
10bf6894 4042creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4043holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4044number 1000 is initially stored.
4045
4046When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4047first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4048memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4049So:
4050
4051@smallexample
4052 foo = 1;
4053@end smallexample
4054
4055looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4056associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4057address. Whereas:
4058
4059@smallexample
4060 int * a = & foo;
4061@end smallexample
4062
10bf6894 4063looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4064and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4065the variable @samp{a}.
4066
4067Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4068the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4069an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4070
4071@smallexample
4072 foo = 1000;
4073@end smallexample
4074
4075creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4076the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4077address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4078linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4079access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4080
4081Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4082you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4083use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4084section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4085linker script contains these declarations:
4086
4087@smallexample
4088@group
4089 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4090 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4091 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4092@end group
4093@end smallexample
4094
4095Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4096
4097@smallexample
4098@group
4099 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4100
73ae6183
NC
4101 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4102@end group
4103@end smallexample
4104
4105Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4106Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4107arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4108
4109@smallexample
4110@group
4111 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4112
4113 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4114@end group
4115@end smallexample
4116
4117Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4118operators.
73ae6183 4119
252b5132 4120@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4121@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4122@kindex SECTIONS
4123The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4124into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4125
4126The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4127@smallexample
4128SECTIONS
4129@{
4130 @var{sections-command}
4131 @var{sections-command}
4132 @dots{}
4133@}
4134@end smallexample
4135
4136Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4137
4138@itemize @bullet
4139@item
4140an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4141@item
4142a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4143@item
4144an output section description
4145@item
4146an overlay description
4147@end itemize
4148
4149The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4150@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4151those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4152understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4153the layout of the output file.
4154
4155Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4156below.
4157
4158If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4159linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4160section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4161input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4162example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4163in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4164
4165@menu
4166* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4167* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4168* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4169* Input Section:: Input section description
4170* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4171* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4172* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4173* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4174* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4175@end menu
4176
4177@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4178@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4179The full description of an output section looks like this:
4180@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4181@group
7e7d5768 4182@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4183 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4184 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4185 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4186 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4187 @{
4188 @var{output-section-command}
4189 @var{output-section-command}
4190 @dots{}
abc9061b 4191 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4192@end group
4193@end smallexample
4194
4195Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4196
4197The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4198name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4199The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4200the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4201The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4202
4203Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4204
4205@itemize @bullet
4206@item
4207a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4208@item
4209an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4210@item
4211data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4212@item
4213a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4214@end itemize
4215
4216@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4217@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4218@cindex name, section
4219@cindex section name
4220The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4221meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4222support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4223must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4224example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4225output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4226names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4227quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4228characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4229commas must be quoted.
4230
4231The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4232Discarding}.
4233
4234@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4235@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4236@cindex address, section
4237@cindex section address
4238The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4239address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4240is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4241
4242If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4243section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4244to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4245alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4246contained within the output section.
4247
4248The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4249
4250@itemize @bullet
4251@item
4252If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4253is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4254in that region.
4255
4256@item
4257If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4258regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4259section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4260be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4261
4262@item
4263If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4264the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4265counter.
4266@end itemize
4267
4268@noindent
4269For example:
4270
252b5132
RH
4271@smallexample
4272.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4273@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4274
252b5132
RH
4275@noindent
4276and
ea5cae92 4277
252b5132
RH
4278@smallexample
4279.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4280@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4281
252b5132
RH
4282@noindent
4283are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4284@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4285counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4286counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4287input sections.
252b5132
RH
4288
4289The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4290For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4291so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4292do something like this:
4293@smallexample
4294.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4295@end smallexample
4296@noindent
4297This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4298aligned upward to the specified value.
4299
4300Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4301location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4302sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4303
4304@node Input Section
36f63dca 4305@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4306@cindex input sections
4307@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4308The most common output section command is an input section description.
4309
4310The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4311You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4312in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4313map the input files into your memory layout.
4314
4315@menu
4316* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4317* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4318* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4319* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4320* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4321@end menu
4322
4323@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4324@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4325@cindex input section basics
4326An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4327by a list of section names in parentheses.
4328
4329The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4330describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4331
4332The most common input section description is to include all input
4333sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4334include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4335@smallexample
4336*(.text)
4337@end smallexample
4338@noindent
18625d54 4339Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4340@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4341of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4342match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4343example:
252b5132 4344@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4345EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4346@end smallexample
4347@noindent
4348will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4349and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4350placed inside the section list, for example:
4351@smallexample
b4346c09 4352*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4353@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4354@noindent
4355The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4356two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4357more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4358
4359There are two ways to include more than one section:
4360@smallexample
4361*(.text .rdata)
4362*(.text) *(.rdata)
4363@end smallexample
4364@noindent
4365The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4366@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4367first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4368they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4369@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4370@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4371
8f1732fc
AB
4372When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4373is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4374immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4375@smallexample
4376*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4377@end smallexample
4378@noindent
4379will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4380@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4381from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4382exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4383could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4384@smallexample
4385*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4386@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4387@noindent
4388Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4389before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4390all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4391@smallexample
4392EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4393@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4394
252b5132
RH
4395You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4396You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4397needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4398@smallexample
4399data.o(.data)
4400@end smallexample
4401
ae17ab41
CM
4402To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4403of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4404
4405Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4406
4407@smallexample
4408@group
4409SECTIONS @{
4410 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4411 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4412@}
4413@end group
4414@end smallexample
4415
4416In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4417input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4418@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4419@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4420whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4421
967928e9
AM
4422You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4423matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4424with no whitespace around the colon.
4425
4426@table @samp
4427@item archive:file
4428matches file within archive
4429@item archive:
4430matches the whole archive
4431@item :file
4432matches file but not one in an archive
4433@end table
4434
4435Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4436wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4437single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4438@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4439within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4440also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4441other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4442from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4443command.
4444
252b5132
RH
4445If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4446the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4447commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4448@smallexample
4449data.o
4450@end smallexample
4451
967928e9
AM
4452When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4453and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4454characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4455name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4456did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4457though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4458@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4459the archive search path.
4460
4461@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4462@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4463@cindex input section wildcards
4464@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4465@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4466@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4467In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4468name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4469
4470The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4471pattern for the file name.
4472
4473The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4474
4475@table @samp
4476@item *
4477matches any number of characters
4478@item ?
4479matches any single character
4480@item [@var{chars}]
4481matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4482character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4483@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4484@item \
4485quotes the following character
4486@end table
4487
4488When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4489will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4490Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4491exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4492@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4493a @samp{/} character.
4494
4495File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4496specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4497does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4498
4499If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4500appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4501will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4502sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4503@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4504@smallexample
4505.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4506.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4507@end smallexample
4508
bcaa7b3e 4509@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4510Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4511in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4512this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4513pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4514@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4515into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4516
bcaa7b3e
L
4517@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4518@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4519difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4520descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4521Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4522reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4523
02ecc8e9
L
4524@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4525@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4526difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4527ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4528encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4529
bcaa7b3e
L
4530@cindex SORT
4531@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4532
4533When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4534can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4535
4536@enumerate
4537@item
4538@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4539It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4540sections have the same name.
4541@item
4542@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4543It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4544sections have the same alignment.
4545@item
c0065db7 4546@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4547treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4548@item
4549@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4550is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4551@item
4552All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4553@end enumerate
4554
4555When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4556section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4557takes precedence over the command line option.
4558
4559If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4560command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4561treated as nested sorting command.
4562
4563@enumerate
4564@item
4565@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4566@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4567@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4568@item
4569@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4570@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4571@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4572@end enumerate
4573
4574If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4575command line option will be ignored.
4576
eda680f8
L
4577@cindex SORT_NONE
4578@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4579section sorting option.
4580
252b5132
RH
4581If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4582@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4583precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4584
4585This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4586files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4587sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4588The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4589with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4590linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4591@smallexample
4592@group
4593SECTIONS @{
4594 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4595 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4596 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4597 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4598@}
4599@end group
4600@end smallexample
4601
4602@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4603@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4604@cindex common symbol placement
4605@cindex uninitialized data placement
4606A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4607file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4608linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4609named @samp{COMMON}.
4610
4611You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4612other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4613particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4614input files are placed in another section.
4615
4616In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4617@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4618@smallexample
4619.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4620@end smallexample
4621
4622@cindex scommon section
4623@cindex small common symbols
4624Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4625example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4626symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4627different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4628the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4629symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4630to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4631locations.
4632
4633@cindex [COMMON]
4634You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4635notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4636@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4637
4638@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4639@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4640@cindex KEEP
4641@cindex garbage collection
4642When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4643it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4644This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4645with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4646@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4647
4648@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4649@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4650The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4651to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4652start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4653@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4654follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4655@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4656@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4657All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4658files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4659
4660@smallexample
4661@group
4662SECTIONS @{
4663 outputa 0x10000 :
4664 @{
4665 all.o
4666 foo.o (.input1)
4667 @}
36f63dca
NC
4668@end group
4669@group
252b5132
RH
4670 outputb :
4671 @{
4672 foo.o (.input2)
4673 foo1.o (.input1)
4674 @}
36f63dca
NC
4675@end group
4676@group
252b5132
RH
4677 outputc :
4678 @{
4679 *(.input1)
4680 *(.input2)
4681 @}
4682@}
4683@end group
a1ab1d2a 4684@end smallexample
252b5132 4685
cbd0eecf
L
4686If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4687and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4688automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4689__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4690indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4691respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4692C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4693
252b5132 4694@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4695@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4696@cindex data
4697@cindex section data
4698@cindex output section data
4699@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4700@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4701@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4702@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4703@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4704You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4705@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4706an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4707parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4708value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4709counter.
4710
4711The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4712store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4713bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4714stored.
4715
4716For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4717of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4718@smallexample
4719BYTE(1)
4720LONG(addr)
4721@end smallexample
4722
4723When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4724same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4725target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4726@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4727@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4728
4729If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4730which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4731When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4732true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4733endianness of the first input object file.
4734
36f63dca 4735Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4736between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4737@smallexample
4738SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4739@end smallexample
4740whereas this will work:
4741@smallexample
4742SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4743@end smallexample
4744
252b5132
RH
4745@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4746@cindex holes, filling
4747@cindex unspecified memory
4748You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4749current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4750otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4751gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4752with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4753necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4754point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4755than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4756different parts of an output section.
4757
4758This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4759value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4760@smallexample
563e308f 4761FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4762@end smallexample
4763
4764The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4765section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4766part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4767entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4768precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4769expression.
252b5132
RH
4770
4771@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4772@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4773There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4774commands.
4775
4776@table @code
4777@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4778@cindex input filename symbols
4779@cindex filename symbols
4780@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4781The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4782The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4783file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4784the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4785
4786This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4787normally used for any other object file format.
4788
4789@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4790@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4791@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4792@item CONSTRUCTORS
4793When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4794unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4795destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4796arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4797automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4798For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4799linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4800@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4801ignored for other object file formats.
4802
4803The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4804constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4805Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4806the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4807first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4808of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4809compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4810formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4811@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4812the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4813destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4814@code{exit}.
4815
4816For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4817arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4818addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4819and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4820linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4821runtime code expects to see.
4822
4823@smallexample
4824 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4825 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4826 *(.ctors)
4827 LONG(0)
4828 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4829 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4830 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4831 *(.dtors)
4832 LONG(0)
4833 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4834@end smallexample
4835
4836If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4837which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4838are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4839are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4840command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4841@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4842@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4843@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4844
4845Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4846and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4847need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4848scripts.
4849
4850@end table
4851
4852@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4853@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4854@cindex discarding sections
4855@cindex sections, discarding
4856@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4857The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4858This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4859may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4860@smallexample
49c13adb 4861.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4862@end smallexample
4863@noindent
4864will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4865@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4866sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4867space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4868too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4869space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4870@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4871@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4872This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4873
a0976ea4 4874The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4875on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4876symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4877the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4878section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4879
4880@cindex /DISCARD/
4881The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4882input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4883section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4884
4885@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4886@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4887@cindex output section attributes
4888We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4889like this:
0c71d759 4890
252b5132 4891@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4892@group
7e7d5768 4893@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4894 [AT(@var{lma})]
4895 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4896 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4897 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4898 @{
4899 @var{output-section-command}
4900 @var{output-section-command}
4901 @dots{}
562d3460 4902 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4903@end group
4904@end smallexample
0c71d759 4905
252b5132
RH
4906We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4907@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4908remaining section attributes.
4909
a1ab1d2a 4910@menu
252b5132
RH
4911* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4912* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4913* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4914* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4915* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4916* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4917* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4918* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4919@end menu
4920
4921@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4922@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4923Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4924parentheses. The following types are defined:
4925
4926@table @code
4927@item NOLOAD
4928The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4929loaded into memory when the program is run.
4930@item DSECT
4931@itemx COPY
4932@itemx INFO
4933@itemx OVERLAY
4934These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4935rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4936marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4937section when the program is run.
4938@end table
4939
4940@kindex NOLOAD
4941@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4942@cindex loading, preventing
4943The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4944the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4945the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4946@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4947need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4948@smallexample
4949@group
4950SECTIONS @{
4951 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4952 @dots{}
4953@}
4954@end group
4955@end smallexample
4956
4957@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4958@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4959@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4960@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4961@cindex load address
4962@cindex section load address
4963Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4964@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4965@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4966specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4967address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4968
ea5cae92
NC
4969The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4970specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4971takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4972load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4973region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4974
4975If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4976section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4977load address:
4978
4979@itemize @bullet
4980@item
4981If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4982the LMA address as well.
4983
4984@item
4985If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4986
4987@item
4988Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4989with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4990section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4991VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4992the last section in the located region.
4993
4994@item
4995If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4996that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4997
4998@item
4999If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5000section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5001@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5002
5003@cindex ROM initialized data
5004@cindex initialized data in ROM
5005This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5006example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5007called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5008@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5009even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5010uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5011defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5012counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5013
5014@smallexample
5015@group
5016SECTIONS
5017 @{
5018 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5019 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5020 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5021 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5022 .bss 0x3000 :
5023 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5024@}
5025@end group
5026@end smallexample
5027
5028The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5029this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5030the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5031how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5032script.
5033
5034@smallexample
5035@group
5036extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5037char *src = &_etext;
5038char *dst = &_data;
5039
ea5cae92
NC
5040/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5041while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5042 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5043
ea5cae92 5044/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5045for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5046 *dst = 0;
5047@end group
5048@end smallexample
5049
bbf115d3
L
5050@node Forced Output Alignment
5051@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5052@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5053@cindex forcing output section alignment
5054@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5055You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5056alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5057intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5058
7e7d5768
AM
5059@node Forced Input Alignment
5060@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5061@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5062@cindex forcing input section alignment
5063@cindex input section alignment
5064You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5065SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5066sections, whether larger or smaller.
5067
0c71d759
NC
5068@node Output Section Constraint
5069@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5070@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5071@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5072@cindex constraints on output sections
5073You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5074of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5075read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5076@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5077
252b5132 5078@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5079@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5080@kindex >@var{region}
5081@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5082@cindex memory regions and sections
5083You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5084using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5085
5086Here is a simple example:
5087@smallexample
5088@group
5089MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5090SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5091@end group
5092@end smallexample
5093
5094@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5095@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5096@kindex :@var{phdr}
5097@cindex section, assigning to program header
5098@cindex program headers and sections
5099You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5100using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5101one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5102assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5103@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5104linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5105
5106Here is a simple example:
5107@smallexample
5108@group
5109PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5110SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5111@end group
5112@end smallexample
5113
5114@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5115@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5116@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5117@cindex section fill pattern
5118@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5119You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5120@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5121(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5122within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5123alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5124necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5125of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5126an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5127fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5128other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5129pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5130expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5131
5132You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5133output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5134
5135Here is a simple example:
5136@smallexample
5137@group
563e308f 5138SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5139@end group
5140@end smallexample
5141
5142@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5143@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5144@kindex OVERLAY
5145@cindex overlays
5146An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5147are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5148the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5149copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5150required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5151can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5152than another.
5153
5154Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5155@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5156output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5157command is as follows:
5158@smallexample
5159@group
5160OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5161 @{
5162 @var{secname1}
5163 @{
5164 @var{output-section-command}
5165 @var{output-section-command}
5166 @dots{}
5167 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5168 @var{secname2}
5169 @{
5170 @var{output-section-command}
5171 @var{output-section-command}
5172 @dots{}
5173 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5174 @dots{}
abc9061b 5175 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5176@end group
5177@end smallexample
5178
5179Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5180section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5181section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5182those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5183except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5184sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5185
abc9061b
CC
5186The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5187the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5188
252b5132
RH
5189The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5190addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5191memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5192whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5193and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5194and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5195
56dd11f0
NC
5196If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5197references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5198the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5199sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5200@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5201
5202For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5203provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5204defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5205@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5206the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5207within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5208symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5209
5210At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5211the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5212
5213Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5214@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5215@smallexample
5216@group
5217 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5218 @{
5219 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5220 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5221 @}
5222@end group
5223@end smallexample
5224@noindent
5225This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5226address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5227@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5228following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5229@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5230@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5231
5232C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5233like the following.
5234
5235@smallexample
5236@group
5237 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5238 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5239 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5240@end group
5241@end smallexample
5242
5243Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5244everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5245example could have been written identically as follows.
5246
5247@smallexample
5248@group
5249 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5250 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5251 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5252 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5253 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5254 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5255 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5256@end group
5257@end smallexample
5258
5259@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5260@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5261@kindex MEMORY
5262@cindex memory regions
5263@cindex regions of memory
5264@cindex allocating memory
5265@cindex discontinuous memory
5266The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5267memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5268
5269The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5270memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5271may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5272can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5273set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5274regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5275around to fit into the available regions.
5276
127fcdff
AB
5277A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5278however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5279specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5280@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5281@smallexample
5282@group
a1ab1d2a 5283MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5284 @{
5285 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5286 @dots{}
5287 @}
5288@end group
5289@end smallexample
5290
5291The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5292region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5293Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5294with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5295must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5296add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5297command.
252b5132
RH
5298
5299@cindex memory region attributes
5300The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5301whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5302not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5303@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5304section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5305the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5306them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5307
5308The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5309@table @samp
5310@item R
5311Read-only section
5312@item W
5313Read/write section
5314@item X
5315Executable section
5316@item A
5317Allocatable section
5318@item I
5319Initialized section
5320@item L
5321Same as @samp{I}
5322@item !
c09e9a8c 5323Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5324@end table
5325
5326If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5327@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5328attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5329in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5330attributes.
5331
5332@kindex ORIGIN =
5333@kindex o =
5334@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5335The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5336the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5337cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5338abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5339@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5340
5341@kindex LENGTH =
5342@kindex len =
5343@kindex l =
5344The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5345region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5346be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5347@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5348
5349In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5350available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5351and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5352linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5353is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5354or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5355explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5356region.
5357
5358@smallexample
5359@group
a1ab1d2a 5360MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5361 @{
5362 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5363 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5364 @}
5365@end group
5366@end smallexample
5367
5368Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5369specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5370@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5371a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5372output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5373was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5374the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5375output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5376region, the linker will issue an error message.
5377
3ec57632 5378It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5379expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5380@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5381
5382@smallexample
5383@group
c0065db7 5384 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5385@end group
5386@end smallexample
5387
252b5132
RH
5388@node PHDRS
5389@section PHDRS Command
5390@kindex PHDRS
5391@cindex program headers
5392@cindex ELF program headers
5393@cindex program segments
5394@cindex segments, ELF
5395The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5396@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5397loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5398program with the @samp{-p} option.
5399
5400When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5401reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5402program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5403This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5404interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5405
5406The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5407in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5408precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5409the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5410not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5411
5412The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5413generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5414ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5415
5416This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5417@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5418
5419@smallexample
5420@group
5421PHDRS
5422@{
5423 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5424 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5425@}
5426@end group
5427@end smallexample
5428
5429The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5430of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5431header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5432with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5433must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5434is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5435
5436Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5437system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5438specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5439sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5440attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5441Section Phdr}.
5442
5443It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5444merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5445repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5446contain the section.
5447
5448If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5449then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5450not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5451convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5452placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5453default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5454segment at all.
5455
5456@kindex FILEHDR
5457@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5458You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5459the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5460The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5461file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5462include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5463segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5464these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5465
5466The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5467value of the keyword.
5468
5469@table @asis
5470@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5471Indicates an unused program header.
5472
5473@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5474Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5475the file.
5476
5477@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5478Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5479
5480@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5481Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5482found.
5483
5484@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5485Indicates a segment holding note information.
5486
5487@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5488A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5489ABI.
5490
5491@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5492Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5493
1a9ccd70
NC
5494@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5495Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5496
252b5132
RH
5497@item @var{expression}
5498An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5499be used for types not defined above.
5500@end table
5501
5502You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5503in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5504@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5505Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5506output section attribute.
5507
5508The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5509which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5510explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5511an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5512header.
5513
5514Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5515headers used on a native ELF system.
5516
5517@example
5518@group
5519PHDRS
5520@{
5521 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5522 interp PT_INTERP ;
5523 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5524 data PT_LOAD ;
5525 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5526@}
5527
5528SECTIONS
5529@{
5530 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5531 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5532 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5533 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5534 @dots{}
5535 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5536 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5537 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5538 @dots{}
5539@}
5540@end group
5541@end example
5542
5543@node VERSION
5544@section VERSION Command
5545@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5546@cindex symbol versions
5547@cindex version script
5548@cindex versions of symbols
5549The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5550only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5551symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5552a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5553shared library.
5554
5555You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5556you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5557also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5558
5559The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5560@smallexample
5561VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5562@end smallexample
5563
5564The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5565Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5566version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5567version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5568version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5569scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5570library.
5571
5572The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5573examples.
5574
5575@smallexample
5576VERS_1.1 @{
5577 global:
5578 foo1;
5579 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5580 old*;
5581 original*;
5582 new*;
252b5132
RH
5583@};
5584
5585VERS_1.2 @{
5586 foo2;
5587@} VERS_1.1;
5588
5589VERS_2.0 @{
5590 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5591 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5592 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5593 "f(int, double)";
5594 @};
252b5132
RH
5595@} VERS_1.2;
5596@end smallexample
5597
5598This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5599version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5600The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5601a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5602of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5603symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5604is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5605in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5606However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5607name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5608
5609Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5610depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5611to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5612
5613Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5614depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5615and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5616
5617When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5618specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5619unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5620unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5621somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5622wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5623wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5624set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5625ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5626
5627The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5628they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5629could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5630However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5631
0f6bf451 5632Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5633in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5634symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5635won't.
5636
5637@smallexample
7c9c73be 5638@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5639@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5640
252b5132
RH
5641When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5642symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5643requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5644shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5645loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5646linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5647application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5648way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5649all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5650search for each symbol reference.
5651
5652The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5653doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5654that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5655functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5656the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5657required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5658that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5659versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5660the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5661
5662There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5663first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5664source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5665script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5666maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5667@smallexample
5668__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5669@end smallexample
5670@noindent
5671in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5672be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5673The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5674@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5675takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5676
5677The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5678function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5679an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5680version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5681linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5682
5683To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5684source file. Here is an example:
5685
5686@smallexample
5687__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5688__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5689__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5690__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5691@end smallexample
5692
5693In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5694unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5695example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5696@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5697
5698When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5699some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5700this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5701@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5702declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5703you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5704
5705If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5706within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5707(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5708specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5709
cb840a31
L
5710You can also specify the language in the version script:
5711
5712@smallexample
5713VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5714@end smallexample
5715
c0065db7 5716The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5717The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5718demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5719patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5720@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5721
86043bbb
MM
5722Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5723described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5724or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5725the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5726whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5727cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5728might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5729should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5730expect when you upgrade.
5731
252b5132
RH
5732@node Expressions
5733@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5734@cindex expressions
5735@cindex arithmetic
5736The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5737that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5738expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5739host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5740
5741You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5742
5743The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5744expressions.
5745
5746@menu
5747* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5748* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5749* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5750* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5751* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5752* Operators:: Operators
5753* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5754* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5755* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5756@end menu
5757
5758@node Constants
5759@subsection Constants
5760@cindex integer notation
5761@cindex constants in linker scripts
5762All constants are integers.
5763
5764As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5765octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5766hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5767@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5768@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5769value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5770
5771@cindex scaled integers
5772@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5773@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5774@cindex suffixes for integers
5775@cindex integer suffixes
5776In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5777constant by
5778@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5779@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5780@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5781@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5782@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5783@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5784@tex
5785${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5786@end tex
5787@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5788respectively. For example, the following
5789all refer to the same quantity:
5790
252b5132 5791@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5792_fourk_1 = 4K;
5793_fourk_2 = 4096;
5794_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5795_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5796@end smallexample
5797
8a308ae8
NC
5798Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5799conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5800
0c71d759
NC
5801@node Symbolic Constants
5802@subsection Symbolic Constants
5803@cindex symbolic constants
5804@kindex CONSTANT
5805It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5806the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5807
5808@table @code
5809@item MAXPAGESIZE
5810@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5811The target's maximum page size.
5812
5813@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5814@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5815The target's default page size.
5816@end table
5817
5818So for example:
5819
5820@smallexample
9d5777a3 5821 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5822@end smallexample
5823
5824will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5825supported by the target.
5826
252b5132
RH
5827@node Symbols
5828@subsection Symbol Names
5829@cindex symbol names
5830@cindex names
5831@cindex quoted symbol names
5832@kindex "
5833Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5834and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5835Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5836specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5837keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5838@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5839"SECTION" = 9;
5840"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5841@end smallexample
5842
5843Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5844to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5845whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5846
ecca9871
L
5847@node Orphan Sections
5848@subsection Orphan Sections
5849@cindex orphan
5850Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5851are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5852script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5853output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5854in which to place the orphaned input section.
5855
5856If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5857an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5858placed at the end of that output section.
5859
5860If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5861sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5862name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5863orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5864one new output section.
5865
5866If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5867then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5868in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5869linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5870attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5871sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5872support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5873
c005eb9e
AB
5874The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5875(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5876output sections an orphan is placed in.
5877
252b5132
RH
5878@node Location Counter
5879@subsection The Location Counter
5880@kindex .
5881@cindex dot
5882@cindex location counter
5883@cindex current output location
5884The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5885current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5886location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5887within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5888anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5889
5890@cindex holes
5891Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5892moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5893location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5894and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5895doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5896
5897@smallexample
5898SECTIONS
5899@{
5900 output :
5901 @{
5902 file1(.text)
5903 . = . + 1000;
5904 file2(.text)
5905 . += 1000;
5906 file3(.text)
563e308f 5907 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5908@}
5909@end smallexample
5910@noindent
5911In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5912located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5913followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5914@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5915@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5916specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5917
5c6bbab8
NC
5918@cindex dot inside sections
5919Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5920current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5921statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5922absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5923however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5924not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5925
5926@smallexample
5927SECTIONS
5928@{
5929 . = 0x100
5930 .text: @{
5931 *(.text)
5932 . = 0x200
5933 @}
5934 . = 0x500
5935 .data: @{
5936 *(.data)
5937 . += 0x600
5938 @}
5939@}
5940@end smallexample
5941
5942The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5943and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5944the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5945much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5946move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5947and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5948the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5949the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5950
b5666f2f
AM
5951@cindex dot outside sections
5952Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5953output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5954needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5955
5956@smallexample
5957SECTIONS
5958@{
5959 start_of_text = . ;
5960 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5961 end_of_text = . ;
5962
5963 start_of_data = . ;
5964 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5965 end_of_data = . ;
5966@}
5967@end smallexample
5968
5969If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5970not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5971between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5972should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5973blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5974the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5975sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5976statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5977special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5978place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5979as follows:
5980
5981@smallexample
5982SECTIONS
5983@{
5984 start_of_text = . ;
5985 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5986 end_of_text = . ;
5987
5988 start_of_data = . ;
5989 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5990 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5991 end_of_data = . ;
5992@}
5993@end smallexample
5994
5995This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5996@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5997placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5998assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5999a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6000section. So you could write:
6001
6002@smallexample
6003SECTIONS
6004@{
6005 start_of_text = . ;
6006 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6007 end_of_text = . ;
6008
6009 . = . ;
6010 start_of_data = . ;
6011 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6012 end_of_data = . ;
6013@}
6014@end smallexample
6015
6016Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6017@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6018
252b5132
RH
6019@need 2000
6020@node Operators
6021@subsection Operators
6022@cindex operators for arithmetic
6023@cindex arithmetic operators
6024@cindex precedence in expressions
6025The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6026the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6027@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6028@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6029@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6030@smallexample
6031precedence associativity Operators Notes
6032(highest)
60331 left ! - ~ (1)
60342 left * / %
60353 left + -
60364 left >> <<
60375 left == != > < <= >=
60386 left &
60397 left |
60408 left &&
60419 left ||
604210 right ? :
604311 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6044(lowest)
6045@end smallexample
6046Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6047(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6048(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6049@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6050@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6051@tex
6052\vskip \baselineskip
6053%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6054\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6055\hrule
6056\halign
6057{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6058height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6059&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6060height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6061\noalign{\hrule}
6062height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6063&highest&&&&&\cr
6064% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6065&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6066&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6067&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6068&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6069&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6070&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6071&7&&left&&|&\cr
6072&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6073&9&&left&&||&\cr
6074&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6075&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6076&lowest&&&&&\cr
6077height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6078\hrule}
6079@end tex
6080@iftex
6081{
6082@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6083@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6084@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6085}
6086@end iftex
6087@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6088
6089@node Evaluation
6090@subsection Evaluation
6091@cindex lazy evaluation
6092@cindex expression evaluation order
6093The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6094an expression when absolutely necessary.
6095
6096The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6097address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6098regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6099as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6100
6101However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6102until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6103other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6104for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6105
6106The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6107assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6108allocation.
6109
6110Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6111@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6112
6113If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6114available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6115following
6116@smallexample
6117@group
6118SECTIONS
6119 @{
a1ab1d2a 6120 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6121 @{ *(.text) @}
6122 @}
6123@end group
6124@end smallexample
6125@noindent
6126will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6127address}.
6128
6129@node Expression Section
6130@subsection The Section of an Expression
6131@cindex expression sections
6132@cindex absolute expressions
6133@cindex relative expressions
6134@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6135@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6136@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6137Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6138relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6139using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6140value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6141symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6142operations.
6143
abf4be64
AM
6144Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6145section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6146address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6147@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6148functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6149One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6150(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6151differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6152versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6153section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6154Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6155absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6156given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6157everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6158
6159In the following simple example,
252b5132 6160
7542af2a
AM
6161@smallexample
6162@group
6163SECTIONS
6164 @{
6165 . = 0x100;
6166 __executable_start = 0x100;
6167 .data :
6168 @{
6169 . = 0x10;
6170 __data_start = 0x10;
6171 *(.data)
6172 @}
6173 @dots{}
6174 @}
6175@end group
6176@end smallexample
252b5132 6177
7542af2a
AM
6178both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6179address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6180@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6181section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6182
5c3049d2
AM
6183For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6184addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6185
6186@itemize @bullet
6187@item
c05f749e
AM
6188Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6189operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6190absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6191@item
7542af2a
AM
6192Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6193relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6194and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6195@item
c05f749e
AM
6196Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6197in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6198address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6199before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6200@end itemize
6201
6202The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6203
6204@itemize @bullet
6205@item
6206An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6207@item
6208The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6209@item
9bc8bb33 6210The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6211relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6212(after above conversions) is also a number when
6213@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6214but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6215@item
6216The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6217relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6218section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6219@item
6220The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6221conversions) is an absolute address.
6222@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6223
6224You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6225to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6226create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6227section @samp{.data}:
6228@smallexample
6229SECTIONS
6230 @{
6231 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6232 @}
6233@end smallexample
6234@noindent
6235If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6236@samp{.data} section.
6237
7542af2a
AM
6238Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6239particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6240
252b5132
RH
6241@node Builtin Functions
6242@subsection Builtin Functions
6243@cindex functions in expressions
6244The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6245use in linker script expressions.
6246
6247@table @code
6248@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6249@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6250@cindex expression, absolute
6251Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6252of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6253value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6254normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6255
6256@item ADDR(@var{section})
6257@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6258@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6259Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6260script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6261the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6262@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6263@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6264the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6265@smallexample
6266@group
6267SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6268 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6269 @{
252b5132
RH
6270 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6271 @dots{}
6272 @}
6273 .output :
6274 @{
6275 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6276 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6277 @}
6278@dots{} @}
6279@end group
6280@end smallexample
6281
876f4090
NS
6282@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6283@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6284@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6285@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6286@cindex round up location counter
6287@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6288@cindex round up expression
6289@cindex align expression
6290Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6291to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6292doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6293arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6294expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6295equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6296
6297Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6298next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6299variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6300input sections:
252b5132
RH
6301@smallexample
6302@group
6303SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6304 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6305 *(.data)
6306 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6307 @}
6308@dots{} @}
6309@end group
6310@end smallexample
6311@noindent
6312The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6313a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6314a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6315of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6316
6317The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6318
362c1d1a
NS
6319@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6320@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6321@cindex section alignment
6322Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6323been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6324evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6325the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6326value in that section.
6327@smallexample
6328@group
6329SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6330 .output @{
6331 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6332 @dots{}
6333 @}
6334@dots{} @}
6335@end group
6336@end smallexample
6337
252b5132
RH
6338@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6339@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6340This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6341scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6342section.
6343
2d20f7bf
JJ
6344@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6345@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6346This is equivalent to either
6347@smallexample
6348(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6349@end smallexample
6350or
6351@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6352(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6353 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6354@end smallexample
6355@noindent
6356depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6357for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6358@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6359If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6360memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6361bytes in the on-disk file.
6362
6363This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6364any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6365@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6366be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6367running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6368that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6369page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6370
6371@noindent
6372Example:
6373@smallexample
6374 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6375@end smallexample
6376
6377@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6378@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6379This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6380evaluation purposes.
6381
6382@smallexample
6383 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6384@end smallexample
6385
a4f5ad88
JJ
6386@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6387@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6388This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6389@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6390When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6391does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6392@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6393argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6394script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6395@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6396padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6397section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6398
6399@smallexample
6400 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6401@end smallexample
6402
252b5132
RH
6403@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6404@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6405@cindex symbol defaults
6406Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6407defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6408return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6409default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6410shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6411the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6412existed, its value is preserved:
6413
6414@smallexample
6415@group
6416SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6417 .text : @{
6418 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6419 @dots{}
6420 @}
6421 @dots{}
6422@}
6423@end group
6424@end smallexample
6425
3ec57632
NC
6426@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6427@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6428Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6429
252b5132
RH
6430@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6431@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6432@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6433Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6434Section LMA}).
6435
2e53f7d6
NC
6436@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6437@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6438Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6439@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6440
252b5132
RH
6441@kindex MAX
6442@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6443Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6444
6445@kindex MIN
6446@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6447Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6448
6449@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6450@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6451@cindex unallocated address, next
6452Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6453This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6454use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6455output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6456
3ec57632
NC
6457@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6458@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6459Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6460
ba916c8a
MM
6461@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6462@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6463Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6464value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6465@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6466will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6467can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6468``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6469name.
6470
252b5132
RH
6471@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6472@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6473@cindex section size
6474Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6475been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6476evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6477@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6478@smallexample
6479@group
6480SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6481 .output @{
6482 .start = . ;
6483 @dots{}
6484 .end = . ;
6485 @}
6486 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6487 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6488@dots{} @}
6489@end group
6490@end smallexample
6491
6492@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6493@itemx sizeof_headers
6494@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6495@cindex header size
6496Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6497information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6498this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6499choose, to facilitate paging.
6500
6501@cindex not enough room for program headers
6502@cindex program headers, not enough room
6503When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6504@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6505number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6506addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6507additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6508room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6509the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6510script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6511you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6512command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6513@end table
6514
6515@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6516@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6517@cindex implicit linker scripts
6518If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6519an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6520linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6521linker will report an error.
6522
6523An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6524
6525Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6526assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6527commands.
6528
6529Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6530at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6531read. This can affect archive searching.
6532
6533@ifset GENERIC
6534@node Machine Dependent
6535@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6536
6537@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6538@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6539sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6540functionality are not listed.
6541
6542@menu
36f63dca
NC
6543@ifset H8300
6544* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6545@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6546@ifset M68HC11
6547* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6548@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6549@ifset ARM
6550* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6551@end ifset
6552@ifset HPPA
6553* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6554@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6555@ifset M68K
6556* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6557@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6558@ifset MIPS
6559* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6560@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6561@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6562* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6563@end ifset
2469cfa2 6564@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6565* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6566@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6567@ifset NDS32
6568* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6569@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6570@ifset NIOSII
6571* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6572@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6573@ifset POWERPC
6574* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6575@end ifset
6576@ifset POWERPC64
6577* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6578@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6579@ifset S/390
6580* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6581@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6582@ifset SPU
6583* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6584@end ifset
74459f0e 6585@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6586* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6587@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6588@ifset WIN32
6589* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6590@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6591@ifset XTENSA
6592* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6593@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6594@end menu
6595@end ifset
6596
252b5132
RH
6597@ifset H8300
6598@ifclear GENERIC
6599@raisesections
6600@end ifclear
6601
6602@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6603@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6604
6605@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6606For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6607you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6608
6609@table @emph
6610@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6611@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6612@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6613targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6614program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6615respectively.
6616
6617@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6618@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6619@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6620@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6621sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6622page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6623(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6624@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6625top page of memory).
1502569c 6626
81f5558e
NC
6627@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6628indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6629displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6630the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6631@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6632whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6633range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6634
1502569c 6635@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6636@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6637biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6638which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6639page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6640(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6641@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6642the top page of memory).
6643
6644@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6645@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
664632 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6647changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6648(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6649@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6650the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6651@end table
6652
6653@ifclear GENERIC
6654@lowersections
6655@end ifclear
6656@end ifset
6657
36f63dca 6658@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6659@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6660@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6661@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6662@node Renesas
6663@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6664
c2dcd04e
NC
6665@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6666H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6667options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6668@end ifset
6669@end ifclear
6670
36f63dca
NC
6671@ifset ARM
6672@ifclear GENERIC
6673@raisesections
6674@end ifclear
6675
93fd0973
SC
6676@ifset M68HC11
6677@ifclear GENERIC
6678@raisesections
6679@end ifclear
6680
6681@node M68HC11/68HC12
6682@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6683
6684@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6685
6686@subsection Linker Relaxation
6687
6688For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6689optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6690
6691@table @emph
6692@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6693@item relaxing address modes
6694@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6695targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6696program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6697respectively.
6698
6699@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6700transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6701page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6702
6703@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6704When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6705of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6706addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6707@code{bset} instructions.
6708
6709@end table
6710
6711@subsection Trampoline Generation
6712
6713@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6714@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6715For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6716call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6717will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6718trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6719case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6720point to the function trampoline.
6721
6722@ifclear GENERIC
6723@lowersections
6724@end ifclear
6725@end ifset
6726
36f63dca 6727@node ARM
3674e28a 6728@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6729
6730@cindex ARM interworking support
6731@kindex --support-old-code
6732For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6733between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6734been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6735line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6736libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6737option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6738given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6739which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6740the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6741non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6742
6743@cindex thumb entry point
6744@cindex entry point, thumb
6745@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6746The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6747@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6748But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6749branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6750executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6751
ce11ba6c
KT
6752@cindex PE import table prefixing
6753@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6754The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6755the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6756element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6757import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6758
e489d0ae
PB
6759@cindex BE8
6760@kindex --be8
6761The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6762executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6763objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6764option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6765little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6766
3674e28a
PB
6767@cindex TARGET1
6768@kindex --target1-rel
6769@kindex --target1-abs
6770The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6771@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6772or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6773and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6774
6775@cindex TARGET2
6776@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6777The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6778@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6779meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6780@table @samp
6781@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6782@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6783@item abs
6784@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6785@item got-rel
6786@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6787@end table
6788
319850b4
JB
6789@cindex FIX_V4BX
6790@kindex --fix-v4bx
6791The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6792specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6793interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6794also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6795
6796In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6797linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6798@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6799
6800In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6801relocations are ignored.
6802
845b51d6
PB
6803@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6804@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6805Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6806relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6807
6808@smallexample
6809TST rM, #1
6810MOVEQ PC, rM
6811BX Rn
6812@end smallexample
6813
6814This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6815and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6816condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6817
33bfe774
JB
6818@cindex USE_BLX
6819@kindex --use-blx
6820The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6821BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6822situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6823code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6824each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6825
6826This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6827specify it if you are using that target.
6828
c6dd86c6
JB
6829@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6830@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6831The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6832bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6833instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6834to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6835the support code can read the intended values.
6836
6837The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6838intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6839and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6840intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6841full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6842you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6843
6844If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6845enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6846@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6847mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6848vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6849@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6850
6851If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6852potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6853such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6854first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6855instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6856the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6857are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6858
2de70689
MGD
6859@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6860@kindex --fix-arm1176
6861@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6862The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6863in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6864are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6865unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6866
9d5777a3 6867Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6868Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6869http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6870
a504d23a
LA
6871@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6872@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6873
6874The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6875workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6876the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6877off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6878the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6879core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6880integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6881VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6882
6883The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6884necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6885
6886The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6887@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6888STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6889linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6890@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6891
6892If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6893potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6894such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6895replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6896branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6897then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6898
6899The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6900the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6901
6902The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6903they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6904there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6905occurs.
6906
6907The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6908PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6909large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6910cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6911occurs.
6912
bf21ed78
MS
6913@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6914@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6915The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6916warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6917enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6918linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6919using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6920not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6921
6922@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6923@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6924The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6925warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6926@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6927linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6928using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6929
726150b7
NC
6930@cindex PIC_VENEER
6931@kindex --pic-veneer
6932The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6933ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6934is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6935@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6936
6937@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6938@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6939The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6940code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6941perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6942placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6943controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6944The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6945duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6946group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6947code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6948where they should be placed.
6949
6950The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6951@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6952placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6953branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6954placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6955value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6956exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6957A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6958linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6959from the input sections.
6960
6961The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6962@samp{N = +1}.
6963
1a51c1a4
NC
6964Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6965only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6966otherwise.
6967
1db37fe6
YG
6968@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6969@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6970@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6971The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6972
6973The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6974
68fcca92
JW
6975@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6976@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6977@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6978The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6979
6980Please contact ARM for further details.
6981
1db37fe6
YG
6982@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6983@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6984@cindex Merging exidx entries
6985The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6986
6987@kindex --long-plt
6988@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6989The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6990which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6991entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6992
1f56df9d
JW
6993@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6994@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6995The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6996link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6997
4ba2ef8f
TP
6998@cindex Placement of SG veneers
6999All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7000Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7001@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7002veneers in memory.
7003
54ddd295
TP
7004@kindex --cmse-implib
7005@cindex Secure gateway import library
7006The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7007specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7008secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7009executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7010
0955507f
TP
7011@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7012@cindex Input import library
7013The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7014must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7015given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7016in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7017@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7018library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7019library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7020for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7021specified.
7022
36f63dca
NC
7023@ifclear GENERIC
7024@lowersections
7025@end ifclear
7026@end ifset
7027
7028@ifset HPPA
7029@ifclear GENERIC
7030@raisesections
7031@end ifclear
7032
7033@node HPPA ELF32
7034@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7035@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7036@kindex --multi-subspace
7037When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7038import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7039The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7040stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7041multiple sub-spaces.
7042
7043@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7044@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7045Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7046stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7047@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7048sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7049a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7050the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7051conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7052prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7053A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7054branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7055@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7056@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7057detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7058positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7059
7060Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7061single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7062create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7063large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7064
7065@ifclear GENERIC
7066@lowersections
7067@end ifclear
7068@end ifset
7069
7fb9f789
NC
7070@ifset M68K
7071@ifclear GENERIC
7072@raisesections
7073@end ifclear
7074
7075@node M68K
7076@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7077
7078@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7079@kindex --got=@var{type}
7080The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7081The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7082@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7083the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7084@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7085entries only at non-negative offsets.
7086@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7087entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7088support such GOTs.
7089@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7090output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7091file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7092files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7093
7094@ifclear GENERIC
7095@lowersections
7096@end ifclear
7097@end ifset
7098
833794fc
MR
7099@ifset MIPS
7100@ifclear GENERIC
7101@raisesections
7102@end ifclear
7103
7104@node MIPS
7105@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7106
7107@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7108@kindex --insn32
7109@kindex --no-insn32
7110The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7111microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7112in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7113used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7114or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7115including 16-bit ones where possible.
7116
8b10b0b3
MR
7117@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7118@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7119@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7120The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7121control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7122@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7123relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7124calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7125relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7126instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7127or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7128the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7129
833794fc
MR
7130@ifclear GENERIC
7131@lowersections
7132@end ifclear
7133@end ifset
7134
36f63dca
NC
7135@ifset MMIX
7136@ifclear GENERIC
7137@raisesections
7138@end ifclear
7139
7140@node MMIX
7141@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7142For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7143@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7144understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7145can translate between the two formats.
7146
7147There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7148Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7149registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7150equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7151@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7152global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7153this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7154symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7155
7a2de473
HPN
7156Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7157@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7158The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7159of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7160
7161Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7162are left out from an mmo file.
7163
7164@ifclear GENERIC
7165@lowersections
7166@end ifclear
7167@end ifset
7168
7169@ifset MSP430
7170@ifclear GENERIC
7171@raisesections
7172@end ifclear
7173
7174@node MSP430
7175@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7176For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7177will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7178just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7179
7180@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7181The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7182
7183@table @code
7184@item @samp{.vectors}
7185Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7186
7187@item @samp{.bootloader}
7188Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7189in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7190
7191@item @samp{.infomem}
7192Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7193this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7194
c0065db7 7195@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7196This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7197in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7198
7199@item @samp{.noinit}
7200Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7201
c0065db7 7202The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7203@end table
7204
7ef3addb
JL
7205@table @option
7206@cindex MSP430 Options
7207@kindex --code-region
7208@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7209This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7210argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7211using this option.
7212
7213@kindex --data-region
7214@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7215This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7216[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7217for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7218
7219@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7220@item --disable-sec-transformation
7221Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7222and @code{--data-region} options.
7223This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7224wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7225not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7226@end table
7227
36f63dca
NC
7228@ifclear GENERIC
7229@lowersections
7230@end ifclear
7231@end ifset
7232
35c08157
KLC
7233@ifset NDS32
7234@ifclear GENERIC
7235@raisesections
7236@end ifclear
7237
7238@node NDS32
7239@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7240@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7241For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7242relaxes objects according to these options.
7243
7244@table @code
7245@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7246Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7247
7248@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7249Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7250
7251@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7252Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7253
7254@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7255Export the EX9 table after linking.
7256
7257@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7258Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7259
7260@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7261Update the existing EX9 table.
7262
7263@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7264Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7265
7266@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7267Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7268
7269@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7270Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7271
7272@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7273Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7274@end table
7275
7276@ifclear GENERIC
7277@lowersections
7278@end ifclear
7279@end ifset
7280
78058a5e
SL
7281@ifset NIOSII
7282@ifclear GENERIC
7283@raisesections
7284@end ifclear
7285
7286@node Nios II
7287@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7288@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7289@kindex --relax on Nios II
7290
7291Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7292transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7293which may result in @command{ld} giving
7294@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7295The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7296trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7297outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7298trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7299be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7300larger than 256MB.
7301
7302The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7303is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7304@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7305locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7306source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7307register as a temporary.
7308
7309Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7310relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7311option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7312
7313@ifclear GENERIC
7314@lowersections
7315@end ifclear
7316@end ifset
7317
2a60a7a8
AM
7318@ifset POWERPC
7319@ifclear GENERIC
7320@raisesections
7321@end ifclear
7322
7323@node PowerPC ELF32
7324@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7325@cindex PowerPC long branches
7326@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7327Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7328displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7329@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7330@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7331the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7332section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7333section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7334@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7335both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7336considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7337
7338@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7339@table @option
7340@cindex PowerPC PLT
7341@kindex --bss-plt
7342@item --bss-plt
7343Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7344generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7345the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7346writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7347@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7348PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7349compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7350BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7351
016687f8
AM
7352@kindex --secure-plt
7353@item --secure-plt
7354@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7355@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7356when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7357layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7358style BSS PLT.
7359
2a60a7a8
AM
7360@cindex PowerPC GOT
7361@kindex --sdata-got
7362@item --sdata-got
7363The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7364sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7365@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7366section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7367@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7368@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7369@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7370@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7371PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7372pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7373GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7374really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7375
7376@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7377@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7378@item --emit-stub-syms
7379This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7380symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7381
7382@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7383@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7384@item --no-tls-optimize
7385PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7386sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7387disable the optimization.
7388@end table
7389
7390@ifclear GENERIC
7391@lowersections
7392@end ifclear
7393@end ifset
7394
7395@ifset POWERPC64
7396@ifclear GENERIC
7397@raisesections
7398@end ifclear
7399
7400@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7401@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7402
7403@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7404@table @option
7405@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7406@kindex --stub-group-size
7407@item --stub-group-size
7408Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7409by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7410@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7411sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7412a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7413the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7414conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7415prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7416A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7417branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7418@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7419@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7420detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7421positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7422
7423Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7424single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7425create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7426large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7427
7428@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7429@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7430@item --emit-stub-syms
7431This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7432symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7433
7434@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7435@kindex --dotsyms
7436@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7437@item --dotsyms
7438@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7439These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7440in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7441function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7442code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7443properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7444to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7445@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7446dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7447feature.
7448
7ae4ea7d
AM
7449@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7450@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7451@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7452@item --save-restore-funcs
7453@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7454These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7455provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7456@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7457function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7458link.
7459
2a60a7a8
AM
7460@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7461@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7462@item --no-tls-optimize
7463PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7464sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7465disable the optimization.
7466
7c9cf415
AM
7467@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7468@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7469@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7470@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7471@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7472These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7473stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7474an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7475@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7476stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7477option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7478Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7479slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7480application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7481normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7482
2a60a7a8
AM
7483@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7484@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7485@item --no-opd-optimize
7486PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7487corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7488the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7489Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7490
7491@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7492@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7493@item --non-overlapping-opd
7494Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7495@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7496the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7497entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7498
7499@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7500@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7501@item --no-toc-optimize
7502PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7503entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7504reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7505marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7506marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7507relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7508unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7509reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7510discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7511reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7512code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7513optimization.
7514
7515@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7516@kindex --no-multi-toc
7517@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7518If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7519@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7520where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7521entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7522total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7523grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7524TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7525calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7526help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
752764K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7528Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7529
7530@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7531@kindex --no-toc-sort
7532@item --no-toc-sort
7533By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7534happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7535placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7536with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7537referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7538@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7539results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7540off this feature.
7541
7542@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7543@kindex --plt-align
7544@kindex --no-plt-align
7545@item --plt-align
7546@itemx --no-plt-align
7547Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7548aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7549boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7550specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7551specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7552if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7553PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7554
7555@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7556@kindex --plt-static-chain
7557@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7558@item --plt-static-chain
7559@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7560Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7561chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7562chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7563
7564@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7565@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7566@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7567@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7568@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7569With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7570lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7571another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7572order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7573memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7574barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7575looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7576seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7577default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7578
7579@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7580@kindex --plt-localentry
7581@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7582@item --plt-localentry
7583@itemx --no-localentry
7584ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7585ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7586(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7587Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7588or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7589functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7590in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7591interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7592including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7593to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7594complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7595care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7596@end table
7597
7598@ifclear GENERIC
7599@lowersections
7600@end ifclear
7601@end ifset
7602
b4cbbe8f
AK
7603@ifset S/390
7604@ifclear GENERIC
7605@raisesections
7606@end ifclear
7607
7608@node S/390 ELF
7609@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7610
7611@cindex S/390 ELF options
7612@table @option
7613
7614@cindex S/390
7615@kindex --s390-pgste
7616@item --s390-pgste
7617This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7618segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7619binaries marked that way.
7620@end table
7621
7622@ifclear GENERIC
7623@lowersections
7624@end ifclear
7625@end ifset
7626
49fa1e15
AM
7627@ifset SPU
7628@ifclear GENERIC
7629@raisesections
7630@end ifclear
7631
7632@node SPU ELF
7633@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7634
7635@cindex SPU ELF options
7636@table @option
7637
7638@cindex SPU plugins
7639@kindex --plugin
7640@item --plugin
7641This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7642
7643@cindex SPU overlays
7644@kindex --no-overlays
7645@item --no-overlays
7646Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7647regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7648@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7649turns off all this special overlay handling.
7650
7651@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7652@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7653@item --emit-stub-syms
7654This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7655symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7656
7657@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7658@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7659@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7660This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7661function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7662on calls to non-overlay regions.
7663
7664@cindex SPU local store size
7665@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7666@item --local-store=lo:hi
7667@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7668the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7669range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7670
c0065db7 7671@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7672@kindex --stack-analysis
7673@item --stack-analysis
7674SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7675unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7676under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7677@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7678@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7679determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7680for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7681for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7682for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7683find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7684and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7685under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7686dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7687is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7688and calls will be given.
7689
c0065db7 7690@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7691@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7692@item --emit-stack-syms
7693This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7694in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7695These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7696functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7697functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7698such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7699The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7700@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7701@end table
7702
7703@ifclear GENERIC
7704@lowersections
7705@end ifclear
7706@end ifset
7707
36f63dca
NC
7708@ifset TICOFF
7709@ifclear GENERIC
7710@raisesections
7711@end ifclear
7712
7713@node TI COFF
7714@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7715@cindex TI COFF versions
7716@kindex --format=@var{version}
7717The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7718TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7719also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7720format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7721header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7722
7723@ifclear GENERIC
7724@lowersections
7725@end ifclear
7726@end ifset
7727
2ca22b03
NC
7728@ifset WIN32
7729@ifclear GENERIC
7730@raisesections
7731@end ifclear
7732
7733@node WIN32
7734@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7735
c0065db7 7736This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7737See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7738command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7739
7740@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7741@cindex import libraries
7742@item import libraries
69da35b5 7743The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7744libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7745regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7746archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7747support for creating such libraries provided with the
7748@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7749
c0065db7
RM
7750@item exporting DLL symbols
7751@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7752The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7753
7754@table @emph
7755@item using auto-export functionality
7756@cindex using auto-export functionality
7757By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7758which is controlled by the following command line options:
7759
0a5d968e
NC
7760@itemize
7761@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7762@item --exclude-symbols
7763@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7764@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7765@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7766@end itemize
7767
09e2aba4
DK
7768When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7769(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7770symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7771often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7772private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7773options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7774exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7775final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7776
7777If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7778command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7779if either of the following are true:
7780
7781@itemize
7782@item A DEF file is used.
7783@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7784@end itemize
dc8465bf 7785
c0065db7
RM
7786@item using a DEF file
7787@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7788Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7789an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7790exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7791name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7792command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7793
7794@example
7795gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7796@end example
7797
0a5d968e
NC
7798Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7799@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7800
dc8465bf
NC
7801Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7802
7803@example
4b5bd4e7 7804LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7805
7806EXPORTS
7807foo
7808bar
7809_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7810another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7811var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7812doo = foo == foo2
7813eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7814@end example
dc8465bf 7815
7fcab871 7816This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7817symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7818alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7819by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7820@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7821@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7822export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7823in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7824symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7825
6b31ad16
DS
7826The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7827name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7828the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7829
b45619c0
NC
7830When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7831library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7832@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7833executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7834
7835With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7836specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7837non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7838
7839If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7840or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7841filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7842
4b5bd4e7
DS
7843The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7844
7845@example
7846EXPORTS
7847 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7848 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7849 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7850@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7851
7852Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7853@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7854@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7855@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7856Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7857@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7858string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7859
7860The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7861
7862@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7863will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7864by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7865linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7866library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7867
7868@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7869The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7870the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7871@code{*_imp__foo}).
7872
7873@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7874well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7875read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7876variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7877the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7878extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7879application will behave unexpectedly.
7880
7881@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7882it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7883symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7884API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7885the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7886
4b5bd4e7
DS
7887See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7888other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7889
7890@cindex creating a DEF file
7891While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7892with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7893
7894@item Using decorations
7895@cindex Using decorations
7896Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7897itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7898declared as:
7899
7900@example
7901__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7902__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7903@end example
7904
7905All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7906any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7907this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7908the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7909
7910Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7911decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7912instead:
7913
7914@example
7915__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7916__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7917@end example
7918
c0065db7
RM
7919This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7920when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7921variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7922code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7923of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7924omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7925@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7926information.
c0065db7 7927@end table
dc8465bf 7928
2ca22b03
NC
7929@cindex automatic data imports
7930@item automatic data imports
7931The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7932by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7933compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7934issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7935code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7936c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7937initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7938decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7939platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7940command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7941The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7942suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7943trigger the feature's use.
7944
c0065db7 7945auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7946additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7947
c0065db7 7948"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7949documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7950
c0065db7
RM
7951The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7952occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7953One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7954below.
7955
7956@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7957For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7958object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7959offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7960field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7961in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7962without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7963The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7964references.
7965
c0065db7
RM
7966The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7967be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7968themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7969runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7970compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7971support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7972run without error on an older system.
7973
c0065db7
RM
7974@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7975enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7976
7977@cindex direct linking to a dll
7978@item direct linking to a dll
7979The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7980including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7981libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7982traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7983libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7984function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7985though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7986storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7987tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7988large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7989
c0065db7 7990Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7991@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7992of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7993perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7994select the dll instead of an import library.
7995
2ca22b03 7996
69da35b5
NC
7997For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7998to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7999
8000@example
45e948fe
NC
8001libxxx.dll.a
8002xxx.dll.a
8003libxxx.a
8004xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8005libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8006cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8007libxxx.dll
8008xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8009@end example
8010
69da35b5
NC
8011before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8012
c0065db7
RM
8013(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8014where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8015@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8016file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8017@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8018
c0065db7
RM
8019Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8020@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8021was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8022various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8023could coexist on the same machine.
8024
2ca22b03
NC
8025The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8026applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8027libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8028
8029@example
8030bin/
8031 cygxxx.dll
8032lib/
8033 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8034 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8035@end example
8036
c0065db7
RM
8037Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8038done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8039
80401. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8041@example
8042gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8043@end example
2ca22b03 8044
69da35b5
NC
8045However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8046(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8047@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8048not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8049
2ca22b03
NC
80502. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8051directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8052should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8053making the app/dll.
8054
8055@example
8056ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8057@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8058
8059Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8060
8061@example
8062gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8063@end example
69da35b5
NC
8064
8065This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8066perfectly legal
8067
8068@example
8069bin/
8070 cygxxx-5.dll
8071lib/
c0065db7 8072 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8073@end example
8074
dc8465bf 8075Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8076even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8077@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8078
8079Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8080wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8081
80821. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8083work with auto-imported data.
8084
dc8465bf
NC
80852. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8086import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8087symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8088for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8089possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8090
45e948fe
NC
80913. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8092critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8093in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8094stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8095
69da35b5 8096So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8097true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8098a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8099binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8100massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8101requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8102will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8103
c0065db7 8104@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8105@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8106@item adding additional names
8107Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8108A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8109exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8110when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8111import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8112
c0065db7 8113@example
dc8465bf
NC
8114LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8115
8116EXPORTS
c0065db7 8117foo
dc8465bf 8118_foo = foo
c0065db7 8119@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8120
8121The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8122
8123Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8124source code using the "weak" attribute:
8125
c0065db7
RM
8126@example
8127void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8128void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8129@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8130
8131See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8132symbols.
8133
8134@item renaming symbols
8135Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8136kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8137@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8138DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8139created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8140
c0065db7 8141@example
dc8465bf
NC
8142LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8143
8144EXPORTS
8145_foo = foo
c0065db7 8146@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8147
8148The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8149@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8150@end table
dc8465bf 8151
0a5d968e 8152Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8153unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8154If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8155@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8156that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8157@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8158renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8159to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8160the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8161In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8162which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8163
8164@cindex weak externals
8165@item weak externals
8166The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8167weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8168defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8169are three variants of weak externals:
8170@itemize
8171@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8172called lazy externals.
8173@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8174This form is not presently implemented.
8175@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8176implemented.
8177@end itemize
8178As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8179are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8180uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8181
8182@cindex aligned common symbols
8183@item aligned common symbols
8184As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8185desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8186the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8187carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8188by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8189tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8190but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8191warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8192
2ca22b03
NC
8193@end table
8194
8195@ifclear GENERIC
8196@lowersections
8197@end ifclear
8198@end ifset
8199
e0001a05
NC
8200@ifset XTENSA
8201@ifclear GENERIC
8202@raisesections
8203@end ifclear
8204
8205@node Xtensa
8206@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8207
8208@cindex Xtensa processors
8209The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8210@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8211specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8212keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8213example, with the command:
8214
8215@smallexample
8216SECTIONS
8217@{
8218 .text : @{
8219 *(.literal .text)
8220 @}
8221@}
8222@end smallexample
8223
8224@noindent
8225@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8226and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8227literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8228interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8229group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8230files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8231and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8232
43cd72b9 8233@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8234@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8235Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8236provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8237is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8238literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8239will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8240location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8241the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8242unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8243@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8244range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8245
8246For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8247to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8248instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8249instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8250instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8251@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8252hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8253By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8254switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8255density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8256instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8257performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8258linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8259a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8260
8261The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8262control the linker:
8263
8264@cindex Xtensa options
8265@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8266@item --size-opt
8267When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8268more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8269no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8270alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8271preserve the correctness of the code.
8272@end table
e0001a05
NC
8273
8274@ifclear GENERIC
8275@lowersections
8276@end ifclear
8277@end ifset
8278
252b5132
RH
8279@ifclear SingleFormat
8280@node BFD
8281@chapter BFD
8282
8283@cindex back end
8284@cindex object file management
8285@cindex object formats available
8286@kindex objdump -i
8287The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8288These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8289object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8290format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8291it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8292associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8293object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8294(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8295list all the formats available for your configuration.
8296
8297@cindex BFD requirements
8298@cindex requirements for BFD
8299As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8300several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8301BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8302formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8303been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8304BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8305may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8306
8307One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8308mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8309useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8310conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8311
8312@menu
8313* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8314@end menu
8315
8316@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8317@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8318@cindex opening object files
8319@include bfdsumm.texi
8320@end ifclear
8321
8322@node Reporting Bugs
8323@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8324@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8325@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8326
ff5dcc92 8327Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8328
8329Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8330it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8331to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8332work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8333@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8334
8335In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8336information that enables us to fix the bug.
8337
8338@menu
8339* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8340* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8341@end menu
8342
8343@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8344@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8345@cindex bug criteria
8346
8347If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8348
8349@itemize @bullet
8350@cindex fatal signal
8351@cindex linker crash
8352@cindex crash of linker
8353@item
8354If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8355@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8356
8357@cindex error on valid input
8358@item
ff5dcc92 8359If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8360
8361@cindex invalid input
8362@item
ff5dcc92 8363If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8364may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8365object files are correct.
8366
8367@item
8368If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8369improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8370@end itemize
8371
8372@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8373@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8374@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8375@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8376
8377A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8378products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8379recommend you contact that organization first.
8380
8381You can find contact information for many support companies and
8382individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8383distribution.
8384
ad22bfe8 8385@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8386Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8387@value{BUGURL}.
8388@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8389
8390The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8391@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8392fact or leave it out, state it!
8393
8394Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8395problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8396assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8397matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8398the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8399location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8400were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8401into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8402specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8403and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8404
8405Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8406the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8407on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8408
8409Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8410bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8411respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8412You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8413
8414To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8415
8416@itemize @bullet
8417@item
ff5dcc92 8418The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8419the @samp{--version} argument.
8420
8421Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8422the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8423
8424@item
ff5dcc92 8425Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8426patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8427
8428@item
8429The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8430version number.
8431
8432@item
ff5dcc92 8433What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8434``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8435
8436@item
8437The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8438observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8439list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8440sufficient.
8441
8442If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8443and then we might not encounter the bug.
8444
8445@item
8446A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8447bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8448provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8449bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8450state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8451requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8452we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8453attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8454
8455If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8456@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8457object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8458@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8459how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8460
8461@item
8462A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8463incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8464
ff5dcc92 8465Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8466will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8467not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8468a chance to make a mistake.
8469
8470Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8471say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8472copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8473C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8474and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8475fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8476you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8477any conclusion from our observations.
8478
8479@item
ff5dcc92 8480If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8481diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8482@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8483If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8484context, not by line number.
8485
8486The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8487sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8488@end itemize
8489
8490Here are some things that are not necessary:
8491
8492@itemize @bullet
8493@item
8494A description of the envelope of the bug.
8495
8496Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8497which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8498changes will not affect it.
8499
8500This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8501will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8502with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8503We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8504
8505Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8506of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8507output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8508less time, and so on.
8509
8510However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8511report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8512
8513@item
8514A patch for the bug.
8515
8516A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8517the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8518a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8519to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8520
ff5dcc92 8521Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8522construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8523through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8524able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8525fixed.
8526
8527And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8528patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8529help us to understand.
8530
8531@item
8532A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8533
8534Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8535things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8536@end itemize
8537
8538@node MRI
8539@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8540@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8541To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8542linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8543alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8544described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8545simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8546@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8547linker commands; these commands are described here.
8548
8549In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8550file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8551features to make use of them.
8552
8553You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8554@samp{-c} command-line option.
8555
8556Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8557command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8558blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8559MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8560issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8561
8562Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8563
8564You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8565lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8566The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8567
8568@table @code
8569@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8570@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8571@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8572Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8573the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8574@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8575your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8576script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8577commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8578input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8579@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8580
8581@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8582@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8583Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8584in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8585
8586@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8587
8588@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8589@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8590Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8591@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8592
8593@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8594@item BASE @var{expression}
8595Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8596absolute addresses) in the output file.
8597
8598@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8599@item CHIP @var{expression}
8600@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8601This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8602
8603@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8604@item END
8605This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8606
8607@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8608@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8609Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8610language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8611
8612@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8613@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8614Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8615@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8616
8617The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8618same line, with no change in its effect.
8619
8620@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8621@item LOAD @var{filename}
8622@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8623Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8624same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8625command line.
8626
8627@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8628@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8629@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8630MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8631option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8632
8633@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8634@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8635@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8636Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8637order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8638script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8639sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8640file, in the order specified.
8641
8642@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8643@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8644@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8645@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8646Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8647@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8648
8649@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8650@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8651@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8652@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8653You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8654specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8655If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8656@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8657@end table
8658
793c5807
NC
8659@node GNU Free Documentation License
8660@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8661@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8662
370b66a1
CD
8663@node LD Index
8664@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8665
8666@printindex cp
8667
8668@tex
7ca01ed9 8669% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8670% meantime:
8671\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8672\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8673\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8674\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8675\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8676\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8677\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8678\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8679\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8680% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8681@end tex
8682
252b5132 8683@bye